Monarch 9403 Users Manual Packet Reference
9825 to the manual bf5caa82-17e6-4370-a7c5-23a6db041b59
2015-02-09
: Monarch Monarch-9403-Users-Manual-557409 monarch-9403-users-manual-557409 monarch pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF
.
Page Count: 287 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

TC9800PM Rev. DD 3/02 ©1996 Monarch Marking Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
✦9403®
✦9825
✦9850
Monarch
Printers

Each product and program carries a respective written warranty, the only
warranty on which the customer can rely. Monarch reserves the right to make
changes in the product, the programs, and their availability at any time and
without notice. Although Monarch has made every effort to provide complete
and accurate information in this manual, Monarch shall not be liable for any
omissions or inaccuracies. Any update will be incorporated in a later edition of
this manual.
©1998 Paxar Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may
be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any
language in any form by any means, without the prior written permission of
Paxar Corporation.
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at his own expense.
CANADIAN D.O.C. WARNING
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from
digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department
of Communications.
Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites
applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe A prescrites dans le Réglement sur le
brouillage radioélectrique édicte par le ministère des Communications du Canada.
Trademarks
Monarch, 9403, 9820, and 9830 are registered trademarks of Monarch Marking Systems, Inc.
Monarch, 1464, 1465, 917, 918, 926, 928, 9800, 9805, 9835, 9840, and 9850 are trademarks of Monarch
Marking Systems, Inc.
Paxar is a trademark of Paxar Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, NT, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
Hewlett-Packard is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
CG Triumvirate and CG Triumvirate Bold are trademarks of AGFA Corporation.
Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain
jurisdictions.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation.
Paxar Corporation
170 Monarch Lane
Miamisburg, OH 45342

TABLE OF CONTENTS
GETTING STARTED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Creating an MPCLII Format Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Daily Startup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Starting with a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Determining Format Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Determining the Print Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Drawing Rough Sketches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Using Supply Layout Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Considering Field Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Considering Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Interchanging Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Using the Format Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Filling in the Format Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
CONFIGURING THE PRINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Setting Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Using Parallel Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Using MPCLII Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
MPCLII Punctuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Standard Syntax Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Using Online Configuration Packets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Configuration Packet Header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Configuration Syntax Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Making Print Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Defining the System Setup Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Defining the Supply Setup Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
i

Defining the Print Control Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Defining the Monetary Formatting Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Defining the Control Characters Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Resetting Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Defining the Communication Settings Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Defining the Backfeed Control Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Special Considerations When Using Backfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Defining the Memory Configuration Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Checking Current Buffer Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
About Memory Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Buffer Worksheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Buffer Allocation Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Memory Considerations with Downloaded TrueType Fonts . . . . . . . 2-27
Using Immediate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Enabling Immediate Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Sending Immediate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Clearing Packets from Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Using the Font Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Using the Flash Upload Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Flash Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Uploading Format Header Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
DEFINING FIELDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Defining the Format Header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Defining Text Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Defining Bar Code Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Defining Non-Printable Text Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Defining Constant Text Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Defining Line Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Defining Box Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
ii

DEFINING FIELD OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Applying Field Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Combining Field Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Option 1 (Fixed Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Option 2 (Data Type Restrictions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Option 3 (Data Entry Templates) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Option 4 (Copy Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Merging Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Sub-Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Option 5 (Define Data Entry Sources) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Option 20 (Define Data Entry Prompts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Option 30 (Padding Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Sample Use for Padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Option 31 (Calculate Check Digit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Option 42 (Price Field) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Option 50 (Bar Code Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Option 51 (PDF417 Security/Truncation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Option 52 (PDF417 Width/Length). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Option 60 (Incrementing/Decrementing Fields) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Fixing the First Number in the Incrementing Sequence . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Option 61 (Reimage Field) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Using Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Sum of Products Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Sum of Digits Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
CREATING GRAPHICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Overview of Compliance Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Overview of Bitmapped Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Determining a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Designing Compliance Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
iii

Designing Bitmapped Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Using the Hex Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Using the Run Length Encoding Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Determining How to Store the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Using Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Using Non-volatile RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Using Volatile RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Using Temporary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Creating a Graphic Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Positioning the Graphic Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Defining the Graphic Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Creating Bitmap Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Creating Next-Bitmap Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Creating Duplicate Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Sample Compliance Graphic Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Sample Hex Graphic Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Sample Run Length Graphic Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Placing the Graphic in a Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Defining the Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Sample Compliance Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Sample Bitmap Graphic Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
PRINTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Defining the Batch Header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Defining the Batch Control Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Defining Batch Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Using Special Characters in Batch Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Merged or Sub-Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Incrementing Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
iv

9850 Special Printing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
9850 Serial Bar Code Printing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Downloading Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Sequential Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Batch Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Batch Quantity Zero Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Modifying Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Optional Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Creating DOS Batch Files for Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
STATUS POLLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Inquiry Request (ENQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Inquiry Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
ENQ Reference Table - Byte #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
ENQ Reference Table - Byte #3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Job Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Job Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table (Status 1 Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table (Status 2 Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Status Polling Considerations for Script Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
DIAGNOSTICS AND ERRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Printing a Test Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Reading a Test Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
If You Receive an Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
If the PC and Printer Aren’t Communicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Calling Technical Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Additional Diagnostics Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Reading an Error Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Data Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Communication Failures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Data Formatting Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Machine Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
v

PRINTER OPTIMIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Adjusting the Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Reducing Imaging Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
General Format Tips and Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
SAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Sample UPCA Format Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Sample MaxiCode Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Mode 0 (Obsolete) Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Mode 2 Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Mode 3 Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Sample Data Matrix Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Square Data Matrix Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Rectangular Data Matrix Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Sample Quick Response Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Entering Batch Data for QR Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
QR Code Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Structured Append Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Structured Append QR Code Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Sample Compliance Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Sample Format Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Sample Data Entry Format Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
FONTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
EFF Swiss Bold Font. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Paxar Font 70 and Font 71 Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
NAFTA Font 72 and Font 73 Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Bitmap Font Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
vi

Monospaced Font Magnification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Using 203 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Using 300 DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Proportional Font Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Scalable/TrueType® Font Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
Format Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
Downloading TrueType Fonts (9825/9850) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
Using Asian (Double-Byte) TrueType Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
Double-Byte Bitmap Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
Double-Byte TrueType Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
Character Mapping Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
Sample Asian (Double-Byte) Font Format and Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
Licensing Your Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
Using Font Numbers in Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
Locating the Font Number in a Font Packet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
SYMBOL SETS/CODE PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Supported Symbol Sets and Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Using Code 128 Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Entering Extended Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Using International Character Sets/Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Internal Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
ANSI Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Bold Character Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
OCRA Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Code Page 100 (Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Code Page 101 (Wingdings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Code Page 437 (Latin U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Code Page 850 (Latin 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Code Page 852 (Latin 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Code Page 855 (Russian) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
vii

Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Code Page 1250 (Latin 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Code Page 1252 (Latin 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Code Page 1253 (Greek) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Code Page 1254 (Turkish). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Code Page 1255 (Hebrew) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Code Page 1256 (Arabic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Code Page 1257 (Baltic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
Code Page 1258 (Vietnamese). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
Binary to Hex Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Binary to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Binary to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
Binary to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
Dot to Run Length Encoding Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
ON (Black) Dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
OFF (White Dots) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
FORMAT DESIGN TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Online Configuration Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Batch Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Check Digit Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
PRINTER DIFFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Printer Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
1464/1465 Printer/Applicator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Printer Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Status Polling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
viii

GETTING STARTED 1
Before you read this manual, review the printer information in the
Operator’s Handbook or Operating Instructions. This manual
provides the necessary information to design, write and print a
Monarch® Printer Control Language II (MPCLII) format. The
following printers support this type of format:
N9403® (V. 1.0 or greater)
N9825 (V. 1.0 or greater)
N9850 (V. 1.0 or greater)
If you are designing formats for a Monarch® 1464 or 1465 printer
applicator, follow the 9850 printer information provided in this manual.
However, there are a few differences. See Appendix E, "Printer
Differences" for 1464/1465 specific information, along with a description of
each printer’s features.
About This Manual
You do not need to be a programmer to use this manual, but you
must be familiar with creating text files and using basic MS-DOS®
commands. This chapter describes how to
Ncreate and download a sample MPCLII packet.
Nuse the Supply Layout Grid and Format Worksheet.
Ncategorize data into field types and select fonts to use in
your format.
See "Defining Text Fields" in Chapter 3 for a list of available fonts for your
printer. See Chapter 4, "Defining Field Options," for a list of available
options for your printer.
Getting Started 1-1

Before You Begin
1. Connect the printer to the host. Refer to the Quick Reference
or Operator’s Handbook for more information.
2. Load supplies in the printer. Refer to the Quick Reference or
Operator’s Handbook for more information.
3. Turn on the printer.
4. Set the communication parameters and configure the printer.
The communication parameters at the printer must match
those at the host. See Chapter 2, "Configuring the Printer,"
for more information.
5. Design your format. See "Starting with a Design" for more
information.
6. Download your format to the printer. See Chapter 6,
"Printing," for more information.
Creating an MPCLII Format Packet
A format defines which fields appear and where the fields are
printed on the label. The printer requires this information in a
special form, using Monarch Printer Control Language II (MPCL).
This section describes how to create a sample MPCLII format
packet.
Make sure supplies are loaded, the printer is connected to the
host and is ready to receive data. Refer to the Quick Reference
or Operator’s Handbook for more information.
For detailed information about the format header, text, constant
text, and bar code fields, see Chapter 3, "Defining Fields." For
information about batch packets, see Chapter 6, "Printing."
1. Type the following format header, in any text editor:
{F,25,A,R,M,508,508,"FMT-25" p
1-2 Getting Started

2. Type the following constant text field:
C,250,80,0,1,1,1,W,C,0,0,"MONARCH MARKING:",0 p
3. Type the following bar code field:
B,1,12,F,110,115,1,2,120,5,L,0 p
4. Type the following text field:
T,2,18,V,30,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p }
You have created a format packet for your MPCLII printer. Now, a
batch packet must be created before you can print the format.
5. Type the following batch header, after the text field line:
{B,25,N,1 p
6. Type the following bar code data:
1,"12345678901" p
7. Type the following text field data:
2,"DAYTON, OHIO" p }
8. Save your file as SAMPLE.FMT.
9. Type MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1 at the DOS prompt if you are
using serial communications. This sets the communication
parameters at your host. These communication parameters
must match those at your printer. See "Setting
Communication Parameters," in Chapter 2, or your host’s
documentation for more information.
Getting Started 1-3

10. Type COPY SAMPLE.FMT COM1. The
following 2 inch by 2 inch label prints:
{F,25,A,R,M,508,508,"Fmt 25" p
C,250,80,0,1,2,1,W,C,0,0,"MONARCH
MARKING" p
B,1,12,F,110,115,1,2,120,5,L,0 p
T,2,18,V,30,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0 p }
Sample Batch Packet
{B,25,N,1 p
1,"12345678901" p
2,"DAYTON, OHIO" p }
See "Starting with a Design" to design your format and Chapter 3,
"Defining Fields" to create text, bar code, and line fields.
Daily Startup Procedures
You may want to design a checklist for operators to follow each
day. Here are a few suggested items: Turn on the printer and
host, make sure ribbon and supplies are loaded, make sure
communication parameters are set, and download packets from
the host to the printer.
You may want to keep records of supplies that have been printed.
A good way to do this is to design a print log for operators to
complete at the end of the day. Here are some suggestions for
types of information to include in a print log: date, operator’s
name, format name, supply size, quantity printed, evaluation of
print quality, and problems/comments.
Keep backup copies of your format, batch data, check digit, and
graphic packets.
1-4 Getting Started

Starting with a Design
Before you create a format packet, you must design your label.
There are several steps to designing a custom label:
1. Decide which fields should appear on your label. See
"Determining Format Contents" for more information.
2. Determine your label size. Labels are available from Monarch
in a wide variety of sizes. Your application and the amount of
data you need to print determines the supply size. Contact
your Account Manager or Technical Support for more
information.
3. Draw a rough sketch of your label. You may want to draw
several variations to see what works best. See "Drawing
Rough Sketches" for more information.
4. Identify the field types that appear on your label. See
"Considering Field Types" for more information.
5. Decide which fonts you want to use. See "Considering Fonts"
for more information.
6. Fill out your Format Worksheet. See "Using the Format
Worksheet" for more information.
At this point, you are ready to send your design to the printer. To
do this:
7. Create a format packet, based on how you filled out your
worksheet. See Chapter 3, "Defining Fields," for more
information.
8. Download your format packet to the printer. See Chapter 6,
"Printing," for more information.
Getting Started 1-5

Determining Format Contents
Before you lay out your format, you need to make a few
decisions. For example: How large is your supply, which fonts do
you want to use, do you want to include a bar code, and do you
want to include graphics?
Determining the Print Area
The "bottom" is the edge that exits the printer first. The 0,0 point
is at the bottom left corner of the label. For the 9403 printer, the
print area begins 0.10 inches from the left edge of the supply. For
the 9800 series printers, the print area is in the center of the
label. Check the table to determine the maximum print area.
Printer Unit of Measure Maximum Supply Size
(Width x Length)
Maximum Print Area
(Width x Length)
9403 English (1/100 in) 200 x 600 200 x 600
Metric (1/10mm) 508 x 1524 508 x 1524
Dots (1/203 dots) 406 x 1218 406 x 1218
9825/
9850
English 425 x 1750 400 x 1600
Metric 1080 x 4445 1016 x 4064
Dots 863 x 3553 812 x 3248
9850
with
optional
300 dpi
English 425 x 1750 400 x 1600
Metric 1080 x 4445 1524 x 4064
Dots 1275 x 5250 1200 x 4800
When designing formats, keep in mind the following non-print
zones for the 9403 printer:
Bottom .035 inches at the beginning of the label.
Left .10 inches from the left edge of the label.
The following non-print zones are recommended for the 9800
series printers:
All Supplies .050 inches on either edge of the label.
All Supplies .020 inches at the end of the label.
1-6 Getting Started

If using the optional verifier, allow a minimum no-scan zone at the
top of the label of 1.3" (33 mm) for speeds 6.0 ips or less; 1.8"
(46 mm) for 8.0 ips; and 2.2" (56 mm) for 10.0 ips.
Use the following formulas to convert inches to dots and metric:
Dots = inches x 203 (or 300 dots per inch)
Metric (1/10mm) = inches x 254
English (1/100 inch) = 100 x (dots/203) or (dots/300)
Dots = Metric (1/10 mm) x 799/1000 (or 1181/1000)
300 dpi depends on your printer.
Drawing Rough Sketches
After you decide what information you want to print, sketch how
you want the information to appear on the label. Note any areas
that are preprinted on the label, such as a logo.
As soon as you know what information to include
on the label, and you have a rough sketch, you
can use a supply layout grid to help you layout
and size your label. If you do not want to use a
grid, go to "Considering Field Types" to choose
what information you want on your label.
Getting Started 1-7

Using Supply Layout Grids
A supply layout grid contains measurement markers. These
markers help you accurately position information on your label.
Decide whether you want to design formats using English, Metric,
or Dot measurements. Choose from the following grids:
NEnglish
The English grid, shown to the
right, is measured in 1/100
inches.
NMetric
The Metric grid is measured in
1/10 millimeters (mm).
NGraphic
The printer uses dots to print
images on a label. The
printhead has 203 dots per inch
(dpi) or an optional 300 dots per
inch printhead depending on
your printer.
Choose English or Metric units when designing formats to use
with different printers. English or Metric units allow more direct
use of formats on printers with different density printheads.
If you want to use supply layout grids, a copy of each is in
Appendix D, "Format Design Tools."
Supply Layout (dpi)
0.0
0.0 102 203 305 406 508 609 711 812 853
508
406
305
203
102
609
711
812
914
1015
1117
1218
1624
1523
1421
1320
203 300
0.0
750
600
450
300
150
900
1050
1200
1350
1500
1650
1800
2400
2250
2100
1950
0.0 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200
203
300 1350 1500 1650 1800 1950 2100
1-8 Getting Started

Considering Field Types
After you select a supply size, the next step in designing a format
is to decide what information you want to print on the label. For
example, you may want to print your company name, price of an
item, and a bar code that combines information from other places.
Everything you want to print falls into one of the following
categories.
Field Type Description Examples
Text Contains letters, numbers, or
symbols you want to print.
item number, item description,
department number, price, date
Non-Printable
Te x t
Holds data for use later, such as
for merging into another field.
The printer does not print
non-printable text fields.
city, state, and zip code to be
included in a bar code
Bar Code Used for printing bar codes that
can be scanned.
item or serial numbers, zip codes,
information you don’t want to
have visible to customers
Constant Text Prints fixed characters that print
without changing.
company name, company address
Line or Box Highlights or separates items. line marking out the regular price,
border around the supply
Graphic Contains a bitmap image or a
compliance label overlay.
logos
All of the above field types except graphics
are discussed in Chapter 3. See Chapter 5,
"Creating Graphics," for information on
including graphics in your format.
Considering Fonts
When working with fonts, you have three considerations: font
appearance, font size (scalable or bitmapped), and font spacing
(monospaced or proportional).
The TrueType® scalable font, EFF Swiss Bold (font 50) is
standard on the 9825 and 9850 printers. It is not available for the
9403 printer. See Appendix B, "Fonts," for samples of each font.
Getting Started 1-9

Interchanging Packets
You can use an MPCLII format that was designed for another
MPCLII printer on a 9800 series printer. However, the format may
appear smaller (fields will be shorter), because most of the 9800
series printers use a 203 dpi printhead. The 9850 printer has an
optional 300 dpi printhead.
Using the Format Worksheet
The Format Worksheet is divided into sections that list the field
types. Each section has boxes to fill in with parameters that
define your format. A format worksheet is included in Appendix
D, "Format Design Tools."
Filling in the Format Worksheet
Decide what type of field to use on your label.
1. Make a copy of the Format Worksheet.
2. Define the Format Header.
3. Define all non-printable text fields before you define the ones
you want to print. See "Defining Non-Printable Text Fields" in
Chapter 3 for more information.
4. Define options as you require them. See Chapter 4, "Defining
Field Options" for more information.
1-10 Getting Started

CONFIGURING THE PRINTER 2
This chapter discusses how to
Nset communication parameters.
Nupload the printer’s configuration or font information.
Nconfigure the printer using online configuration packets.
Nuse immediate commands to control the printer’s operation
at any time.
Some parameters may not be available on each printer.
See Appendix E, "Printer Differences," for a list of
differences between all the printers.
Configuring the Printer 2-1

Setting Communication Parameters
Use the following information if you are using serial
communications. See "Using Parallel Communications" for
information about parallel communications.
Not all printers have a parallel port.
The communication parameters at the printer must match those at
the host, or you will not be able to communicate.
You can use the communication settings packet to set
communication parameters for your printer.
On MS-DOS computers, you can use the MODE command to set
communication values on your PC.
For example
MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1
This command sets your host to these communication values:
9600 baud, no parity, an 8 bit word length, 1 stop bit.
Using Parallel Communications
If your printer supports parallel communications, the parallel port
is IEEE-1284 or Centronics® mode. You can set which mode to
use through the control panel. Refer to the Quick Reference or
Operator’s Handbook for control panel information. The
communication settings are automatically configured for you.
There are no operator settings required.
We recommend waiting at least two seconds (or longer) when
switching between the serial and parallel ports to send data,
because data may be lost. Be careful when using print spoolers,
because data transmission occurs in the background of the
operating system. This makes data transmission completion
difficult to determine when switching between ports.
2-2 Configuring the Printer

Using MPCLII Conventions
Here are some guidelines to follow when using MPCLII.
MPCLII Punctuation
Use the following symbols when creating MPCLII packets:
{start of header
}end of header
p field separator (Use hex 7C for this character.
Depending on the code page selected, this
character may appear differently.)
,parameter separator
"ABC" Quotation marks enclose character strings.
Empty quotes ("") identify null strings or
unused fields.
‘comment‘ Grave accents enclose comments. Any data
enclosed in grave accents is ignored. Do not
embed comments within a quoted string.
ENQ and immediate commands are always
processed, even if they are included within
grave accents Grave accents are also used
to reject mainframe data.
These MPCL characters are the default. See "Defining the
Control Characters Packet" to change these characters.
Standard Syntax Guidelines
When creating MPCLII packets:
NBegin each packet with a start of header ({).
NEnd each packet with an end of header (}).
Configuring the Printer 2-3

NDefine no more than 1000 fields (100 fields for 9403) in a
format. Each p indicates one field. However, options are not
counted as fields. The actual number of fields a format can
have may be less, because the number of fields is limited by
the available memory.
NThe field number 0 to 999 (99 for the 9403) must be unique.
Monarch recommends starting at 1, instead of 0.
NDo not use a field number more than once per format.
NDefine all fields in the order you want to image/print them.
The printer does not print in field number order.
NSeparate all parameters with a Parameter Separator (,).
NEnd each field with a Field Separator ( p ).
NEnter all information in CAPITAL letters, except words or
phrases within quotation marks.
NInclude all parameters for a field unless documented as
optional.
NDefine non-printable text fields before the field to which they
apply.
NDefine options immediately after the field to which they apply.
NMultiple options can be used with most fields. Options can be
used in any combination except as noted with each definition.
When using multiple options on the 9403 printer, remember
that options are processed in the order they are received.
NKeep in mind that proportionally spaced fonts need wider
fields than monospaced fonts. For variable field data, use a
letter "W" to determine the maximum field size.
NDo not place a new line (return) or any other non-printing
character in a character string. However, a carriage return or
line break after each p makes your formats easier to read.
T,1,20,V,30,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
T,2,10,V,50,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
NSpaces are ignored, except within character strings.
2-4 Configuring the Printer

NIndenting options improves readability of your formats.
T,1,18,V,30,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
R,42,1 p
NUse a tilde (~) followed by a 3-digit ASCII code in a quoted
string to send function codes or extended characters or send
the 8-bit ASCII code.
You can modify formats and fields with the optional entry method.
See "Optional Entry Method" in Chapter 6 for more information.
Using Online Configuration Packets
Use online configuration packets to change the printer settings.
You can send an individual packet or a packet that contains all
eight online configuration packets. You can supply all parameters
for each packet. Leave the parameters blank that you do not
need to change. For example,
{ I,A,,,,1 p } prints a slashed zero and uses the last sent online
System Setup parameters.
Make a copy of the online configuration worksheet in Appendix D,
"Format Design Tools," and save the original. Packets A-M are
listed on the worksheet.
When you turn off the printer, all the information in the online
configuration packets is saved and used when the printer is
turned back on. After you change printer configurations, you
must resend the format, batch, or graphic to the printer before the
changes take effect.
Configuration Packet Header
Always include an I, immediately after the left bracket { and
before the packet identifier (A, B, C, etc.). The I parameter
identifies the data stream as a configuration packet.
Configuring the Printer 2-5

Include the I parameter with each packet if
you are sending them individually. Include it
only at the beginning of a data stream if you
are sending multiple packets.
This is the syntax to use when you create online configuration
packets:
Syntax
{Start of Header
I,Configuration Header
1 to 8 optional packets
A, parameter 1...parameter 5 p System Setup
B, parameter 1...parameter 5 p Supply Setup
C, parameter 1...parameter 5 p Print Control
D, parameter 1...parameter 3 p Monetary Formatting
E, parameter 1...parameter 9 p Control Characters
F, parameter 1...parameter 5 p Communication Settings
G, parameter 1...parameter 4 p Backfeed Control
M, parameter 1...parameter 4 p Memory Configuration
}End of Header
Syntax for single packet
{Start of Header
I,Configuration Packet Identifier
A, parameter 1...parameter 5 System Setup
}End of Header
You can also add a configuration to non-volatile RAM or specify
units for supply, print, margin, and cut positions. If you use the
optional parameters with the I packet, any online configuration
packets following the split vertical bar ( p ) must specify distances
using the selected units. However, the test labels display the
units in dots, even if you entered them in English or Metrics units.
Syntax {header,ID#,action,device p }
1. header Constant I.
2. ID# ID. Use 0.
2-6 Configuring the Printer

3. action AAdd configuration.
U Upload User Configuration.
4. device Storage Device. Options:
MMemory
NNonvolatile RAM
RVolatile RAM
5. units Units. (Optional parameter.) Options:
EEnglish
MMetric
GDots
Example {I,0,A,N,E p
C,0,25,0,0,0 p }
Adds a configuration to non-volatile RAM and specifies English
units. It also uses the default contrast, moves print 0.25 inches
closer to the bottom of the supply and does not change the
margin adjustment, prints at the default print speed, and uses the
default printhead width.
If you do not use the optional parameters, the syntax for the
online configuration packets does not change. For example,
{I,C,0,50,0,0,0 p }
uses the default contrast, moves print 50 dots (0.25) inches
closer to the bottom of the supply and does not change the
margin adjustment, prints at the default print speed, and uses the
default printhead width.
Example {I,0,U,N p }
Uploads the printer configuration from nonvolatile RAM and
returns the following to the host.
A,0,0,0,0,0 p
B,2,1,0,0,0 p
C,0,0,0,0,0,0 p
D,1,0,2 p
E,"~123~044~034~124~125~126","","~013~010" p
F,3,1,0,0,1 p
G,0,65,65 p
M,R,8725,1345,N,2535,615 p
M,R,R,300 p
Configuring the Printer 2-7

M,T,R,20 p
M,I,R,3300 p
M,D,N,1280 p
M,F,N,640 p
M,V,R,3740 p
The parameters for each packet (A-M) are displayed. In the first
line that begins with M, 8725 is the total volatile memory
available, 1345 is the memory used in volatile RAM. 2535 is the
total non-volatile memory available, 615 is the memory used in
non-volatile RAM. The remaining lines beginning with M list the
buffer sizes in 1/10K for the Receive, Transmit, Image,
Downloadable Fonts, Formats, and Scalable Fonts Buffers.
Configuration Syntax Guidelines
When creating a printer configuration packet:
NFollow the "Standard Syntax Guidelines" listed at the
beginning of this chapter.
NBegin a packet with the configuration header (I).
NDownload multiple configuration packets within one packet or
download a single configuration packet.
NInclude the first five ANSI codes, at a minimum, in the control
characters packet.
NIf you change any of the online configuration packets, resend
the format packet to the printer, so the configuration changes
take effect.
NMake sure the communication settings at the host match those
at the printer.
NSend configuration packets once per session (each time the
printer is turned off and then back on), not with every format
or batch packet.
2-8 Configuring the Printer

Making Print Adjustments
You can adjust where the printer prints on your supply by
adjusting the supply, print, or margin positions. However, keep in
mind the following:
NSupply adjustments across the width of your supply, such as
the margin position, are based in dots- either 203 dpi or 300
dpi, depending on your printhead density.
NSupply adjustments for the length of your supply, such as
supply position or print adjustment, are always measured in
1/203 of an inch, regardless of your printhead density.
Defining the System Setup Packet
Use the system setup packet (A) to select the power up mode,
display language, print separators between batches, print a
"slashed zero," and select the symbol set.
Syntax {I,A,powup_mode,language,sep_on,slash_zero,
symbol_set p}
A1. A System Setup Packet
A2. powup_mode Online Mode. Options:
0online mode (default)
1offline mode (9403/9850)
A3. language Display Language. Options
0English (default)
1French
2German
3Spanish
A4. sep_on Batch Separators. Options:
0Does not print a separator (default)
1Prints a separator
2Double-length separator- prints 2 tags (9850)
NOTE: Do not use batch separators with continuous
(non-indexed) supply. If using a stacker, the batch
separator is 3.66 inches long.
Configuring the Printer 2-9

A5. slash_zero Slash Zero. Options:
0Print a standard zero (default)
1Print a zero with a slash through it
A6. symbol_set Symbol Set. Options:
0Internal/ Monarch (default)
1ANSI
2Code Page 437 (Latin U.S.)
3Code Page 850 (Latin 1)
4Code Page 1250 (Latin 2)
5Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic)
6Code Page 1252 (Latin 1)
7Code Page 1253 (Greek)
8Code Page 1254 (Turkish)
9Code Page 1255 (Hebrew)
10 Code Page 1256 (Arabic)
11 Code Page 1257 (Baltic)
12 Code Page 1258 (Vietnamese)
13 DOS Code Page 852 (Latin 2)
14 DOS Code Page 855 (Russian)
15 DOS Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish)
16 DOS Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese)
17 Wingdings
18 Macintosh
19 UNICODE
20 BIG5
21 GB2312
22 SJIS (Shift JIS) to SJIS (Code Page 932, Japanese)
23 GB2312 to GB2312 (Code Page 936, Simplified Chinese)
24 BIG5 to BIG5 (Code Page 950, Traditional Chinese)
25 KSC5601 to KSC5601 (Code Page 949, Korean)
NOTE: The CG Triumvirate fonts support only the ANSI and
DOS Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets. The
scalable font does not support Code Page 1256
(Arabic). See Appendix C for more information.
Code pages 852-860 and 1250-1258 may only be
used with downloaded TrueType fonts or the scalable.
Code Pages 932, 936, and 950 may only be used
with downloaded Double-byte fonts. TrueType fonts
are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all
code pages may not be supported in a given font.
Example {I,A,0,0,1,1,0 p }
Powers up the printer in the online mode, displays prompts in
English, prints a separator after each batch, prints zeros with
slashes through them, and uses the internal symbol set.
2-10 Configuring the Printer

Defining the Supply Setup Packet
Use the supply setup packet (B) to select supply type, ribbon,
feed mode, supply position, and cut position.
Syntax {I,B,supply_type,ribbon_on,feed_mode,
supply_posn,cut_posn p}
B1. B Supply Setup Packet
B2. supply_type Supply Type. Options:
0Black mark supply
1Die Cut/edge aperture supply (default)
2Continuous (non-indexed) supply (9825/9850)
3Center Aperture supply (9850)
Must use with printer applicator
NOTE: You must use continuous supply in continuous mode.
Do not use continuous supply with extended
backfeed or 94x5 emulation. If your aperture supply
has holes on the edge, use 1. If your aperture supply
has holes in the center, use 3.
B3. ribbon_on Ribbon. Options:
0Ribbon not installed (default for 9403)
1Ribbon installed (default for 9825/9850)
2High Energy Ribbon installed (9850)
You must use a print speed of 2.5 IPS with the high energy
ribbon. Serial bar codes cannot be printed using the high
energy ribbon. Settings for ribbon and supply type must
match the supplies loaded in the printer; otherwise, an error
occurs. To clear the error, turn off the printer and change the
configuration packet. Turn on the printer and resend the
packet.
B4. feed_mode Feed Mode. Options:
0Continuous operation (default)
1On-demand mode
B5. supply_posn -300 to 300 in 1/203 inch. 0 is the default. Adjusts the
machine to print at the vertical 0,0 point on the supply. This
adjustment accounts for mechanical tolerances from machine
to machine. The supply position adjustment only needs to be
made on the initial machine setup. Adjust the supply position
if formats do not start at the 0,0 point on the supply. Increase
the supply position to move print up, decrease to move print
down on the label. To verify the 0,0 point, print a test label.
See "Printing a Test Label" in Chapter 8 for more information.
Configuring the Printer 2-11

You can not change the supply position while the printer is
active. Changing the supply position will affect the print
position, dispense position, and backfeed distance. Once the
supply position is set, use the print control packet and
backfeed control packet to adjust printing and the dispense
position.
B6. cut_posn -300 to 300 in 1/203 inch. Use 0 for 9403/9825. Adjusts
where the tag is cut. The printer adjusts the cut position
according to the black marks on the supply. You may need to
adjust for aperture supplies. Increase to move the cut up,
decrease to move the cut down.
Example {I,B,0,0,1,10,50 p }
Indicates black mark and thermal direct stock has been loaded,
causes the printer to operate in on-demand mode, feeds the
supply approximately .05 inches up before printing the format on
each label (10/203 inches), and feeds the supply .25 inches
(50/203 inches) before cutting.
Defining the Print Control Packet
Use the print control packet (C) to set the contrast, print, and
margin adjustment, print speed, and printhead width.
Syntax {I,C,contrast,print_adj,margin_adjust,
speed_adj,ph_width p }
C1. C Print Control Packet
C2. contrast -390 to 156. 0 is the default.
C3. print_adj -99 to 99 in 1/203 inch. 0 is the default. Adjusts where data
prints vertically on the supply. Increase the print position to
move print up, decrease to move print down.
C4. margin_adj -99 to 99 in 1/203 inch (or 1/300 inch for 9850 printer). 0 is
the default. Adjusts where data prints horizontally on the
supply. Increase the margin position to move print to the
right, decrease to move print to the left. Margin and print
position are format adjustments. They will not affect the
supply position, dispense position, or backfeed distance.
2-12 Configuring the Printer

C5. speed_adj Print speed in inches per second (ips). Options:
0Default (formats with serial bar codes automatically
print at 2.5 ips)
20 2.0 ips (only speed for 9403)
25 2.5 ips (default for serial bar codes)
40 4.0 ips
60 6.0 ips (default for 9825/9850)
80 8.0 ips (9850)
100 10.0 ips (9850 with 203 dpi)
120 12.0 ips (9850 with 203 dpi)
NOTE: Serial bar codes with an 8-dot narrow element do not
automatically print at 2.5 ips. Serial bar codes
printed at speeds greater than 2.5 ips may not scan
properly. However, the 9850 printer can print 203 dpi
serial bar codes with narrow elements of 3 dots (or
greater) at 4.0 ips. You must use a print speed of 2.5
ips with the high energy ribbon. See "9850 Special
Printing Considerations," in Chapter 6 for more
information.
C6. ph_width Width of the printhead in dots. Use 0 for these printers.
Example {I,C,0,-20,-10,0,0 p }
Uses the default contrast, moves print 0.1 inch closer to the
bottom of the supply (20/203 inches) and .05 inch to the left on
the supply (10/203 inches), prints at six inches per second, and
uses the default printhead width.
Defining the Monetary Formatting Packet
The monetary formatting packet (D) selects the monetary symbols
to print for a price field. Use the monetary formatting packet to
select primary and secondary monetary symbols, and designate
the number of digits to appear at the right of a decimal.
Syntax {I,D,cur_sym,secondary,decimals p }
D1. D Monetary Formatting Packet
Configuring the Printer 2-13

D2. cur_sym Currency Symbol. Options:
0No symbol
1USA ($, Dollar- default)
2UK (£, Pound)
3Japan (¥, Yen)
4Germany (1, Deutsche Mark)
5France (F, Franc)
6Spain (P, Peseta)
7Italy (L., Lira)
8Sweden (Kr, Krona)
9Finland (2, Markka)
10 Austria (6, Shilling)
11 India (Rs, Rupee)
12 Russian (3, Ruble)
13 Korean (4, Won)
14 Thai (5, Baht)
15 Chinese (¥, Yuan)
16 Euro-Dollar (c)
NOTE: To use these symbols, select the internal symbol set.
D3. secondary Secondary Sign. Options:
0No secondary sign (default)
1Print secondary sign
NOTE: Secondary symbols only print if you designate at
least one decimal place.
D4. decimals Number of digits to the right of the decimal. Options:
0No digits
1One digit
2Two digits (default)
3Three digits
Example {I,D,1,1,2 p }
Prints the dollar sign, uses a secondary symbol, and places two
digits to the right of the decimal.
Defining the Control Characters Packet
Use the control characters packet (E) to change the MPCLII
control characters, enable and disable the immediate commands,
and change the default terminator character for job requests and
ENQ’s.
2-14 Configuring the Printer

Changes take effect with the first character following the end of
header character } of the configuration packet. Each control
character must be unique and cannot appear anywhere else in
your packet, except within quotation marks. You can customize
the trailer characters to work with your host.
Wait two seconds for the new characters to
take effect before sending packets using the
new characters.
Use the following syntax for the control characters packet. Notice
all but the first parameter are within quotation marks.
Syntax {I,E,"ANSI_cd","string1","string2" p }
E1. E Control Characters Packet
E2. "ANSI_cd" ~123 Start of header { (left bracket)
~044 Parameter , (comma)
separator
~034 Quoted strings " (quotes)
~124 Field separator p (pipe sign- use hex 7C)
~125 End of header } (right bracket)
~126 Data escape ~~ (double tilde)
character (optional)
def. ch. Immediate command character (optional).
Up to any 3 characters in the 0 to 255 decimal
range. The character must be defined before this
command can be used. The caret (~094) is
normally used.
NOTE: "ANSI_cd" includes seven separate parameters. The
first five parameters are required. The other
parameters are optional.
E3. "string 1" Terminator for status requests and ENQ requests. Up to any 3
characters in the 0 to 255 decimal range. The default is
"013". Sending "" disables this sequence.
E4. "string 2" Terminator for job requests and data uploads. Up to any 3
characters in the 0 to 255 decimal range. The default is none.
Sending "" disables this sequence.
Configuring the Printer 2-15

After you change these parameters, all packets, including any
future configuration packets, must use the new control characters.
Monarch recommends using the tilde and ASCII character code
sequence when sending this packet multiple times. Also, set the
packet delimiters to characters within the 21 hex to 7E hex range.
You must send the control characters packet to enable the
immediate commands. An immediate command will execute
immediately, even if it is embedded within quotation marks, and
all data following the command in the string will be ignored.
Example {I,E,"~123~063~034~124~125~126~094" p }
Changes the parameter separator character from , to ?. The
other control characters remain unchanged. It also enables the
immediate commands by defining the ^ symbol as the command
identifier.
Resetting Control Characters
You can change the characters in the previous example back to
their original settings by downloading this packet:
{I?E?"~123~044~034~124~125~126~094"
p }
Notice that the parameter separator is ? in this packet. This is
the parameter separator that was set before this packet. Once
the packet is received by the printer, the new parameter separator
(a comma, in this case) is valid.
Be careful when using this feature. If you forget what the control
characters were changed to, print a test label. (The test label
lists the current control characters.) See "Printing a Test Label,"
in Chapter 8 for more information.
2-16 Configuring the Printer

Defining the Communication Settings Packet
Use the communication settings packet (F) to set the baud rate,
word length, stop bits, parity, and flow control for serial
communications. To set parallel communications, see "Using
Parallel Communications."
Changing the communication settings takes approximately two
seconds. Communications sent during this interval will be lost.
Make sure the host communication values match the values on
the printer and the host is capable of communicating at the speed
you select for the printer.
Do not add any characters, such as a
carriage return/line feed, in your
communication settings packet or
communications errors may occur.
Syntax {I,F,baud,word_length,stop_bits,parity,
flow_control p }
F1. F Communication Settings Packet
F2. baud Baud Rate. Options:
0 1200 1 2400
2 4800 3 9600 (default)
4 19200 5 38400
6 57600 (9850) 7 115200 (9850)
NOTE: The 9403 printer does not support 38400 baud or
greater.
F3. word_length Word Length. Options:
07-bit word length
18-bit word length (default)
F4. stop_bits Stop Bits. Options:
01-stop bit (default)
12-stop bits
F5. parity Parity. Options:
0None (default)
1ODD parity
2EVEN parity
Configuring the Printer 2-17

F6. flow_control Flow Control. Options:
0None 2(CTS)
1DTR (default) 3XON/XOFF
NOTE: If you use the DOS COPY command to download
your formats, set "Flow Control" to DTR (not
XON/XOFF).
Example {I,F,3,1,0,0,1 p }
Uses 9600 baud, an 8-bit word length, one stop bit, no parity, and
the DTR mode.
Defining the Backfeed Control Packet
Use the backfeed control packet (G) to enable or disable the
backfeed option, set the dispense position and the backfeed
distance. Backfeed works by advancing each printed label to the
desired dispense position. Once that label is removed, the next
label to be printed is backed up underneath the printhead. In
continuous mode, only the last label in the batch is advanced to
the dispense position. You may need to adjust the dispense
position to allow labels to be removed, die cut labels to be
removed easily, or to prevent them from falling off.
Extended backfeed is available on the 9850 printer with a knife
installed. Extended backfeed feeds a tag far enough out to be cut
and backfeeds the next tag to the printhead line. You can not
change the backfeed distance while the printer is active.
Extended backfeed eliminates printed tags
being left between the printhead and knife.
Extended backfeed does not work with
non-indexed (continuous) supply/mode.
Do not use backfeed (normal or extended) with supplies less than
0.75 inches. We recommend using 0.5-inch gap supplies in peel
mode when backfeed is disabled.
2-18 Configuring the Printer

The 9403 printer does not support the backfeed packet. The
dispense position and backfeed distance are optional parameters
and do not have to be specified. However, they allow for greater
precision when positioning the supply.
Syntax {I,G,action,dis_pos,bkfd_dis p }
G1. G Backfeed Control Packet
G2. action Action. Options:
0disable backfeed (default)
1enable backfeed (use on any printer without a knife)
2enable extended backfeed (use on 9850 printer with
a knife installed)
G3. dis_pos Dispense Position. Adjusts the stopping point of the label. 50
to 200 dots (default 65 dots). Use 95 dots for the printer
applicator.
G4. bkfd_dis Backfeed Distance. Amount to move label backwards. 10 to
200 dots (default 65 dots). Use 95 dots for the printer
applicator. Cannot be greater than the dispense position.
The backfeed distance should equal the dispense position.
An exception is if you are tearing instead of peeling. Then,
the backfeed distance must be 30 dots (.150 inches) less than
the dispense position. However, you will have a 30 dot
non-print zone on your supply. The 30-dot difference
accounts for improper tearing of butt cut supplies, because
you do not want any exposed adhesive under the printhead.
Example {I,G,2 p }
Enables extended backfeed and cuts any tags remaining between
the knife and printhead and moves the supply backwards so the
next tag is underneath the printhead. Using cut mode 4, you do
not have to press FEED (FEED/CUT) to cut the last tag.
Example {I,G,1,50,10 p }
Enables backfeed and sets the dispense position to 0.25 inches
(50/203) and the backfeed distance to 0.05 inches (10/203).
Configuring the Printer 2-19

Special Considerations When Using Backfeed
Make a note of the following items:
NBe careful when tearing supplies, because the adhesive can
adhere to the printhead or platen roller.
NBackfeed affects each label in the on-demand mode or the
first and last label of the batch in continuous mode.
NWhen backfeed is enabled and multiple batches are sent, the
printer may not backfeed between each batch.
NBackfeed should only be used when you need to advance
labels to the desired dispense point.
NBackfeed does not interfere with the supply, print, or margin
positions you have set.
NIf the supply inter-label gap is not between .07 inch to .15 inch
(14 to 30 dots), you must adjust the dispense position and
backfeed distance accordingly.
See the following graphic for a representation of the following
adjustments: dispense position, backfeed distance, supply
position, print position, and margin position.
Contact Technical Support if you have problems adjusting where
the format prints on the supply.
2-20 Configuring the Printer

Defining the Memory Configuration Packet
Use the memory configuration packet (M) to customize the size of
your printer’s buffers, which gives you greater flexibility in your
formats.
Memory must be allocated in 1/2K increments. The memory
configuration packet does not accept decimals, so enter whole
numbers. Multiply the amount to reallocate (in K) by 10. For
example,
To reallocate (in K) Enter this amount
110
1.5 15
220
2.5 25
153 1530
229.5 2295
Each buffer’s allocated memory remains in effect until that buffer
is reallocated. For this reason, you may want to reallocate all the
buffers when reallocating any buffer. If you reallocate more
memory than you have available, you will receive an error.
Syntax {I,M,buffer,device,buffer_size p }
M1. M Memory Configuration Packet
M2. buffer Buffer type:
DDownloadable Fonts
FFormat
IImage
RReceive
TTr a n s m i t
VScalable (vector) Fonts (9825/9850)
Configuring the Printer 2-21

M3. device Storage type:
NNon-volatile RAM
RVolatile RAM
NOTE: You cannot reallocate flash memory.
M4. buffer size Buffer size in 1/10K ranges. See the following table for
ranges.
Example {I,M,I,R,1530 p }
Stores the image buffer in volatile RAM and allocates 153K for it.
The following table lists the configured buffer sizes and min-max
values for your printer. The printer’s configuration is stored in
non-volatile RAM and retained when you turn off the printer. The
maximum value for each buffer is listed; however, the sum of all
the buffers cannot exceed the maximum available memory of the
printer.
Buffer Type 9403 9825* 9850
Transmit Vol. 1K
(.5K- 4K)
2K
(.5K- 4K)
2K
(.5K- 4K)
Receive Vol. 8K
(2K- 32K)
8K
(2K- 64K)
8K
(2K- 64K)
Image Vol. 67K
(41.5K- 124K)
330K
(41.5K- 640K)
585K
(38.5K- 6144K)
Downld. Fonts NVol.
Vol.
NA
20K
(8K- 32K)
64K
(8K- 640K)
NA
120K
(8K- 1024K)
NA
Scalable Fonts Vol. NA 64K
(32K-640K)
384K
(0K-1024K)
Formats NVol.
Vol.
NA
32K
(16K- 64K)
64K
(16K- 640K)
NA
128K
(16K- 1024K)
NA
Internal NA cannot
reallocate
cannot
reallocate
cannot
reallocate
* The 9825 printer does not have non-volatile RAM; however, you can store formats and
fonts in flash memory.
2-22 Configuring the Printer

Use the following table to see how much memory is available to
reallocate.
RAM* 9403 9825 9850
Volatile RAM 256K 1 Meg 8 Meg
Non-volatile RAM NA NA 512K
* You cannot reallocate more memory than what is available, or you will receive an error.
Checking Current Buffer Sizes
Send a configuration upload packet to check the sizes of your
current buffers. See "Configuration Packet Header" for more
information. After you check your current buffer sizes you can
begin reallocating memory.
If you want to increase your image buffer and you will not be
using scalable fonts, add that memory into your image buffer.
Example {I,M,R,R,20 p Receive buffer 2K
M,T,R,10 p Transmit buffer 1K
M,D,N,80 p Downloadable fonts 8K
M,V,R,160 p Scalable fonts buffer 16K
M,I,N,3200 p } Image buffer 320K
Make sure memory is available before adding memory to a buffer.
In the above example, if the image buffer (M,I,N,3200) was
defined before the downloadable fonts and scalable fonts buffers
(M,D,N,80 and M,V,R,160) were defined, an error would have
occurred.
Configuring the Printer 2-23

About Memory Buffers
Transmit Buffer Used to send ENQ, job, and upload
responses. This buffer must be allocated as
volatile (R) RAM.
Receive Buffer Used to save data received from the host
before it is processed by the printer.
Changing this buffer size affects the amount
of data the printer can receive without using
flow control. This buffer must be allocated as
volatile (R) RAM.
Image Buffer Used to image the current format. The 9825
and 9850 printers support two 4-inch by
8-inch buffers. You can create an image up
to 16 inches long without reallocating
memory. The Image Buffer is cleared after a
printer reset, even if it is stored in non-volatile
RAM.
Use the formula below to calculate the
required image buffer size.
19.13K x
Length
Length is the length of your label in inches.
Example 19.13K x 6 = 114.78K
(Multiply by 10 and round up.)
114.78K x 10 = 1147.8
1147.8 = 1150
Enter 1150 for your Image buffer.
2-24 Configuring the Printer

Format Buffer Used to store formats, batch data, and
graphics. Use the following formula to
calculate the required format buffer size:
Linecount
x 50/1024
Linecount is the number of lines in your
format packet including the format header
and all the options.
The result of the above calculation is in
kilobytes.
On the 9825 and 9850 printers, formats
remain in memory when you turn off the
printer.
Downloadable
Fonts Buffer
Used to store downloaded soft (bitmapped or
TrueType) fonts. To determine the size of
your downloadable fonts, send a font packet.
For TrueType fonts, the file size, in bytes, is
the minimum amount needed in this buffer.
See "Using the Font Packet" for more
information.
Scalable (Vector)
Fonts Buffer
Used to image the scalable or downloaded
(TrueType or bitmapped) font characters.
Increasing this buffer size allows more
characters to be saved in cache memory, so
the characters do not have to be re-built the
next time they are printed. Use 0 if you are
not using scalable/TrueType fonts. This buffer
must be allocated as volatile (R) RAM.
The printer does not print the fonts if there is
not enough memory in this buffer to image
them.
Not all printers support the scalable font.
Configuring the Printer 2-25

Buffer Worksheet
Make copies of this page to use as a buffer worksheet.
Buffer Allocation Considerations
Keep these items in mind when allocating memory.
NDo not allocate more memory than what is available.
NFree memory from one buffer before you add it to another
buffer.
NReallocate all the buffers if you need to reallocate any buffer.
NSend all buffer (re)allocations in one packet. The printer
evaluates each individual buffer allocation separately. If one
buffer allocation is invalid, the entire packet is invalid. For
example, if you send
{I,M,R,N,20 p
M,T,N,60 p
...}
the printer ignores the entire packet, because the second line
HEADER
BUFFER
DEVICE
BUFFER SIZE
M
DOWN LOADABLE
FONTS BUFFER D
FORMAT
BUFFER
IMAGE
BUFFER
RECEIVE
BUFFER
TRANSMIT
BUFFER
SCALABLE
FONTS BUFFER
MF
MI
MR
MT
MV
maximum of 2295
maximum of 2295
maximum of 2295
maximum of 320
maximum of 40
maximum of 1280
R
R
R
2-26 Configuring the Printer

allocates 6K for the transmit buffer, and 4K is the maximum for
that buffer. If you define a buffer size that exceeds the
maximum value, an error occurs. However, no information is
lost.
NWhenever the printer accepts a memory configuration packet,
it takes effect immediately, causing a printer reset. Any
information contained in the buffers is lost. Resend your
formats, batches, graphics, or fonts to the printer.
NIf you remap your image buffer, make sure the length and
width specified in your format header are not too large for the
current image buffer. In other words, if you remap for a 4 x 4
inch label, you cannot print a 4 x 6 inch label without receiving
an error, until you change your format header or increase your
image buffer.
Memory Considerations with Downloaded TrueType
Fonts
NDownloaded TrueType fonts are only available on the 9825 and
9850 printers.
NThe size of the TrueType font file, in bytes, is the minimum
amount of memory you must have available in the
downloadable fonts buffer.
NThe scalable (vector) fonts buffer is used to image the
downloaded fonts (TrueType or bitmapped). If you are using
several downloaded TrueType fonts, you may need 100K or
more in this buffer. The printer does not print the fonts if there
is not enough memory in the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.
NTo use large point sizes (greater than 60 point), you must
reconfigure memory and increase the size of the scalable
(vector) fonts buffer.
NFont storage is limited on the 9825 printer, because there is no
extended memory available.
Configuring the Printer 2-27

Using Immediate Commands
Immediate commands affect printer operation as soon as the
printer receives them, even if they are included within a packet or
used inside quotation marks.
You can use immediate commands to change immediate
command or status polling control characters, reset the printer, or
cancel and repeat batches.
Enabling Immediate Commands
When the printer is first turned on, these commands are not
available. To use these commands, you must first send the
control characters packet and define the immediate command
control character. The immediate command control character is
saved in non-volatile RAM and therefore not lost after you turn off
the printer. Once the immediate command control character is
defined, the immediate commands are enabled.
Sending Immediate Commands
Immediate commands consist of a three- or four-character
sequence you can send in a packet or embed in your application.
Each command must be sent separately.
Syntax control character_immediate command
The printer can accept only one immediate command at a time.
Sending a command before the previous one is completed can
result in an error.
Example ^CB
Immediately cancels the batch currently printing. This example
assumes that the defined immediate command control character
is the caret (^).
2-28 Configuring the Printer

Command Parameter
^CA Cancels all the batches in the queue.
^CB Cancels only the current batch being printed.
^DD or
^DCd
Disables the MPCL data escape character (the tilde) and inhibits MPCL
from acting on ANY data escape sequence from the host. Sets the MPCL
data escape character to the ASCII value given by the d parameter. The
value can be any ASCII character.
^EA Aborts an error condition. This command is the same as pressing CLEAR
(ESCAPE/CLEAR) to clear an error. May need to be sent multiple times.
Use ^RB to reprint batch.
CAUTION: Command causes the current batch to stop and the
condition that caused the error to remain uncorrected.
^ER Resets the error. This command is the same as pressing FEED
(FEED/CUT) to acknowledge an error. Normal operation will resume.
^FD Feeds a label when printer is idle. Simulates the operation of pressing
FEED (FEED/CUT) and dispenses the next label if printer is in the
on-demand mode. NOTE: Printer ignores this command if printing.
^FF1 Formats flash memory (either in the 9825/9850 printer or the 9850 optional
SIMM board)
^FF2 Returns the amount (in bytes) of the available flash memory.
^GD Disables conversion of formats designed in 203 dpi density dot units to 300
dpi density.
^GE Enables the conversion of formats designed in 203 dpi dot units (not
English or Metric) to 300 dpi.
^ID or ^ICd Disables the Immediate Command feature by turning off the Immediate
Command escape character. Sets the Immediate Command escape
character to the ASCII value given by the d parameter. The value can be
any ASCII character.
^MC Returns the customer ID or RPQ version to the host. (00 to 99)
^MD Returns the printhead dot density to the host. 00 = 203 dpi 01 = 300 dpi
^MI Returns the customer ID or RPQ revision level to the host. (00 to 99)
^MM Returns the model number to the host. 11 = M9403 16 = M9850
17 = 9825
^MP Returns the prototype number to the host. (00 to 99)
^MR Returns the revision number to the host. (00 to 99)
^MV Returns the version number to the host. (00 to 99)
^PR Resets the printer. This command takes five seconds to complete and then
the printer is ready to receive data. It has the same effect as turning off
and then turning on the printer.
NOTE: Command should be used only when the printer is not printing.
Configuring the Printer 2-29

Command Parameter
^RB Repeats the last printed batch, printing the same number of labels as
specified in the original batch. This command does not work if using batch
separators.
NOTE: Printer ignores this command if printing.
^RS Resynchronizes supply when supply roll is changed.
NOTE: Printer ignores this command if printing.
^SD or
^SCd
Disables the status polling feature by turning off the status polling control
character. Sets the status polling control character to the ASCII value
given by the d parameter. The value of d can be any ASCII character.
^SFa Loads script with host response (9825/9850)
^SFb Loads script without host response (9825/9850).
^SFc Enables script (9825/9850).
^SFd Disables script (9825/9850).
^SFe Uploads script version information (9825/9850).
^SFf Deletes script (9825/9850).
^SFg Turns on ENQ status polling before it reaches the script (9825/9850).
^SFh Turns off ENQ status polling before it reaches the script (9825/9850).
^SFi Turns on immediate commands before it reaches the script (9825/9850).
^SFj Turns off immediate commands before it reaches the script (9825/9850).
^TP Prints a test label set. NOTE: Printer ignores this command if printing.
The table represents the defined immediate command control
character as ^ and the defined status polling control character as
d. You may define these characters to suit your needs.
To use the immediate command control
character or the status polling character
within your data, use the tilde sequence.
Clearing Packets from Memory
You may want to remove packets from the printer to increase
memory storage capacity or if the formats/fonts/graphics are no
longer needed. In some cases, turning the printer off may clear
the packets from memory. If not, send a format clear packet.
2-30 Configuring the Printer

Syntax {header,packet#,action,device p }
1. header Identifies the packet. Options:
ACheck Digit Scheme
FFormat
GGraphic (9825 V1.0 or greater)
WFont
2. packet# Identification number of the packet to clear (1-999) or font
number (0-9999). 0 is for all formats, fonts, or graphics.
3. action Enter C to clear the packet.
4. device Storage device. Options:
NNonvolatile RAM
RVolatile RAM
Example {F,1,C,R p }
Clears Format #1 from volatile RAM.
Using the Font Packet
You can use a font packet to add or clear downloaded fonts from
memory, upload your font buffer, or upload the cell size
information for a particular font. The font packet is useful when
you are downloading fonts. If you are using downloaded fonts,
the font number and the number of bytes each downloaded font
uses is listed.
This packet does not list the number of bytes the standard printer
fonts use.
Syntax {W,font#,action,device p }
W1. W Writable Font Header.
W2. font# Font number from 0-9999.
0 is for all fonts. 1 - 5 digits is the font number.
Example: 11 is the standard printer font,
CG Triumvirate.
Configuring the Printer 2-31

W3. action Action. Options:
AAdds the specified font.
CClears all or specified fonts, except ones in ROM.
HUploads font size information.
MUploads font memory usage information.
NOTE: C does not clear (erase) fonts saved in the 9825 or
9850 printer’s flash memory or on the optional SIMM
board. You must format flash memory to erase fonts
from the printer’s flash memory or the SIIMM board.
However, when you format flash memory, ALL fonts
saved in the printer’s flash memory or SIMM board
are deleted.
W4. device Device. Options:
FFlash (9825/9850)
RVolatile RAM
ZAll devices (use for upload).
If you are creating fonts, you need to have font data included with
this packet. Software is available to create the font data and
packet. Call Technical Support for more information.
Example {W,0,M,R p }
Selects all fonts and checks the memory usage in RAM. The
printer returns the following to the host:
{W,0,M,R p
Number of bytes free, Number of bytes used p }
Example {W,0,H,Z p }
Selects all fonts and uploads the font size information for any
downloaded fonts.
2-32 Configuring the Printer

The printer returns the following to the host:
{W,0,H,Z p
0,1,0,"Standard",0,0,0,21,33,21,33,5,1 p
0,1,1,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0,1 p
0,1,437,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0,1 p
0,1,850,"CGTriBd9",1,0,7,25,31,10,15,0,1 p
0,2,0,"Reduced",0,0,0,10,21,10,21,2,1 p
0,2,1,"CGTriumv6",1,0,8,27,34,11,17,0,1 p
0,2,437,"CGTriumv6",1,0,8,27,34,11,17,0,1 p
0,2,850,"CGTriumv6",1,0,8,27,34,11,17,0,1 p
0,3,0,"Bold",0,0,0,36,51,36,51,5,1 p
0,4,0,"OCRA",0,0,0,19,36,19,36,5,1 p
0,5,0,"HR1",0,0,0,18,30,18,30,3,1 p
0,6,0,"HR2",0,0,0,26,24,26,24,2,1 p
0,10,0,"CGTriBd9",1,0,10,37,45,15,22,0,1 p
0,10,1,"CGTriBd9",1,0,10,37,45,15,22,0,1 p
0,10,437,"CGTriBd9",1,0,10,37,45,15,22,0,1 p
0,10,850,"CGTriBd9",1,0,10,37,45,15,22,0,1 p
0,11,0,"CGTriumv6",1,0,6,21,26,8,13,0,1 p
0,11,1,"CGTriumv6",1,0,6,21,26,8,13,0,1 p
0,11,437,"CGTriumv6",1,0,6,21,26,8,13,0,1 p
0,15,0,"CGTriumv7",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0,1 p
0,15,1,"CGTriumv7",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0,1 p
0,15,437,"CGTriumv7",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0,1 p
0,15,850,"CGTriumv7",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0,1 p
0,16,0,"CGTriumv9",1,0,12,44,54,17,28,0,1 p
0,16,1,"CGTriumv9",1,0,12,44,54,17,28,0,1 p
0,16,437,"CGTriumv9",1,0,12,44,54,17,28,0,1 p
0,16,850,"CGTriumv9",1,0,12,44,54,17,28,0,1 p
0,17,0,"CGTriumv11",1,0,15,54,66,22,35,0,1 p
0,17,1,"CGTriumv11",1,0,15,54,66,22,35,0,1 p
0,17,437,"CGTriumv11",1,0,15,54,66,22,35,0,1 p
0,17,850,"CGTriumv11",1,0,15,54,66,22,35,0,1 p
0,18,0,"CGTriumv15",1,0,19,73,88,30,46,0,1 p
0,18,1,"CGTriumv15",1,0,19,73,88,30,46,0,1 p
0,18,437,"CGTriumv15",1,0,19,73,88,30,46,0,1 p
0,18,850,"CGTriumv15",1,0,19,73,88,30,46,0,1 p
0,510,0,"CGTriumv7",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0,1 p
0,510,1,"CGTriumv7",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0,1 p
0,510,437,"CGTriumv7",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0,1 p
0,510,850,"CGTriumv7",1,0,9,33,40,13,22,0,1 p
Font Style
Symbol Set
Font Name
Ty p e
Baseline
Spacing
Cell Height
Cell Width
Inter-Character Gap
Nominal Height
Nominal Width
Printhead Density
Configuring the Printer 2-33

0,511,0,"CGTriumv9",1,0,12,44,54,17,28,0,1 p
0,511,1,"CGTriumv9",1,0,12,44,54,17,28,0,1 p
0,511,437,"CGTriumv9",1,0,12,44,54,17,28,0,1 p
0,511,850,"CGTriumv9",1,0,12,44,54,17,28,0,1 p
0,512,0,"CGTriumv11",1,0,15,54,66,22,35,0,1 p
0,512,1,"CGTriumv11",1,0,15,54,66,22,35,0,1 p
0,512,437,"CGTriumv11",1,0,15,54,66,22,35,0,1 p
0,512,850,"CGTriumv11",1,0,15,54,66,22,35,0,1 p
0,513,0,"CGTriumv15",1,0,19,73,88,30,46,0,1 p
0,513,1,"CGTriumv15",1,0,19,73,88,30,46,0,1 p
0,513,437,"CGTriumv15",1,0,19,73,88,30,46,0,1 p
0,513,850,"CGTriumv15",1,0,19,73,88,30,46,0,1 p
0,70,0,"Paxar15",0,0,10,48,66,34,66,5,1 p
0,71,0,"Paxar18",0,0,13,50,77,41,77,7,1 p
0,72,0,"Nafta15",1,0,6,32,66,32,66,0,1 p
0,73,0,"Nafta18",1,0,8,33,77,33,77,0,1 p
0,50,0,"CGTriBd",1,1,92248,0 p }
This example shows the fonts for the 9850
printer. Fonts 510, 511, 512, and 513 are the
same as fonts 15, 16, 17, and 18.
Spacing Monospaced (0) or proportional (1).
Ty p e Bitmapped (0) or scalable (1).
Baseline Bottom of the font.
Cell Width Horizontal number of dots to contain the
widest character.
Cell Height Vertical number of dots to contain the tallest
character.
Nominal Width Average width for lower-case letters.
Nominal Height Average height for lower-case letters.
Inter-Character
Gap
Default spacing between characters in
monospaced fonts.
2-34 Configuring the Printer

Printhead Density Displays whether a 203 (0) dpi or 300 (1) dpi
printhead is used.
The scalable font (font 50) is not available for
all printers and it does not display which
printhead (203 dpi or 300 dpi) is used.
Using the Flash Upload Packet
Use the flash upload packet to check the contents of flash
memory.
You can only use this packet on 9403 Version
2.0 (or greater) printers.
Syntax {header,packet#,action p }
1. header Identifies the packet. Options:
ACheck Digit Scheme
FFormat
GGraphic
2. packet# Identification number of the packet. Use 0 to upload all
packets.
3. action Enter H to upload flash information.
Example {F,0,H p }
Selects all the formats in flash memory and uploads the
information.
The printer returns the following to the host:
{1,A,F,E,200,200,"FMT1" p
5,A,F,E,400,200,"FMT5" p }
Configuring the Printer 2-35

Format 1 was added to flash memory and uses English units. The
supply length was two inches and the supply width was two
inches. The format name was "FMT1." Format 5 was added to
flash memory and uses English units. The supply length was four
inches and the supply width was two inches. The format name
was "FMT5."
Example {G,0,H p }
Selects all the graphics in flash memory and uploads the
information.
The printer returns the following to the host:
{10,A,F,G,812,406,"Wire" p
99,A,F,G,350,406,"Logo" p }
Graphic 10 was added to flash memory and uses Graphic units.
The supply length was 812 dots and the supply width was 406
dots. The format name was "Wire." Graphic 99 was added to
flash memory and uses Graphic units. The supply length was 350
dots and the supply width was 406 dots. The format name was
"Logo."
If no packets are stored in flash memory, empty brackets {} are
returned to the host.
Flash Considerations
Note the following items when storing formats, graphics, or check
digits in flash:
NPackets with the same number should not be added to flash
memory. If two packets with the same number are stored in
flash, only the last packet sent can be used. For example, if
you send the following packets to flash memory, only the
"Textiles" format can be used.
{F,10,A,F,E,300,200,"UPC"p
p}
{F,10,A,F,E,300,200,"Textiles"p
p}
Flash
Selector
2-36 Configuring the Printer

NClear flash memory if you encounter problems storing packets.
Flash must be cleared through the 9403 printer’s menu.
NIndividual packets cannot be cleared from flash memory.
Clearing flash erases all packets stored in flash memory (with
"F" selector); however, clearing flash does not erase any
packets loaded by Service.
NFlash cannot be reallocated.
Uploading Format Header Information
You can upload format header information from the formats in
memory to check the supply length and width for each format.
You can use this packet on the 9825 or 9850 printers, because
formats remain in memory when you turn off these printers.
Syntax {header,format#,action,device p }
F1. header Format Header
F2. format# Format number from 0-999. 0 is for all formats in memory.
F3. action Action. Options:
AAdds the specified format
CClears the specified format
HUploads format header information
F4. device Device. Options:
RVolatile RAM
ZAll devices (use for upload)
Example {F,0,H,Z p }
Selects all formats in memory and returns the following:
{F,0,H,Z p
Fmt_1,406,406 p
Fmt_10,324,406 p
Fmt_15,812,812 p
Fmt_20,305,609 p
Fmt_25,1218,406 p }
Displays the format number, supply length and supply width (in
dots) for each format in memory.
Configuring the Printer 2-37

Example {F,1,H,Z p }
Selects format1 and returns the following to the host:
{F,1,H,Z p
Fmt_1,406,406 p }
Displays the supply length and supply width (in dots) for format1.
2-38 Configuring the Printer

DEFINING FIELDS 3
This chapter provides a reference for defining
Nthe format header
Ntext, constant text, and non-printable text fields
Nbar code fields
Nline and box fields.
Defining Fields 3-1

Defining the Format Header
A Format Header begins a format file.
Syntax {F,format#,action,device,measure,length,
width,"name" p
F1. F Format Header.
F2. format# Number from 0-999 (0-99 for 9403) to identify the format.
F3. action Enter A to add a new format to the printer.
F4. device Format storage device. Options:
FFlash (9403/9825)
NNon-volatile RAM
RVolatile RAM
F5. measure Unit of measure: E (English), M (Metric), or G (Graphic Dots).
See the following table.
Printer Unit of Measure Supply Length Supply Width
9403
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
75-600
191-1524
152-1218
75-200
191-508
152-406
9825/
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
50-1750
127-4445
102-3552
75-400
191-1016
152-812
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
300 dpi Dots
32-1200
82-3048
65-3600
75-400
191-1016
152-1200
F6. length Supply length in selected units. Measure supply from the top
of one black mark to the top of the next black mark. Use the
previous table for values.
F7. width Supply width, from left to right, in selected units. Use the
previous table for values.
F8. "name" Format name (optional), 0-8 characters, enclose within
quotation marks.
Example {F,1,A,R,E,300,200,"TEXTILES" p
Adds Format 1 ("TEXTILES") to the printer. It uses a three inch
long by two inch wide label.
3-2 Defining Fields

Defining Text Fields
Create a separate definition for each text field. If text falls on two
lines, each line of text requires a separate definition.
Syntax T,field#,# of char,fix/var,row,column,
gap,font,hgt mag,wid mag,color,alignment,
char rot,field rot,sym set p
T1. T Text Field.
T2. field# Unique number from 0-999 (0-99 for 9403) to identify this field.
T3. # of char Maximum number of printed characters is 0-2710 (0-100 for
9403) in the field.
T4. fix/var Fixed or variable length field. Options:
FFixed length
VVariable length
T5. row For monospaced fonts, distance from bottom of print area to
the pivot point. The pivot point varies depending on how text
is justified.
For proportionally spaced fonts, distance
from bottom of print area to baseline of
characters in field.
2 (BOTTOM)
0 (TOP)
1 (LEFT)
3 (RIGHT)
0 (TOP)
2 (BOTTOM)
1 (LEFT)
3 (RIGHT)
0 (TOP)
2 (BOTTOM)
3 (RIGHT)
1 (LEFT)
Left/Center/Right-Justified End-Justified
Balanced
Defining Fields 3-3

Printer Unit of Measure Row or
End Row
Column or
End Column
9403
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-599
0-1523
0-1217
0-199
0-507
0-405
9825/
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4063
0-3247
0-399
0-1015
0-811
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3047
0-3599
0-399
0-1015
0-1199
T6. column Distance from the left edge of the print area to the pivot point
to find the column location. Use the previous table for values.
T7. gap Number of dots between characters 203
dpi (or 300 dpi for 9850 printer). Range:
0-99.
NOTE: For monospaced fonts, the
additional spacing is added to the
existing inter-character gap. This
is also true for proportionally spaced fonts, but
remember that the inter-character gap varies with
character combinations.
Any number other than 0 or the default number affects your
field width. Default spacing:
Standard 3 dots
Reduced 1 dot
Bold 3 dots
OCRA-like 3 dots
CG Triumvirate Bold varies with each letter
CG Triumvirate varies with each letter
T8. font Style of font. Options:
1Standard 10 CG Triumvirate Bold
2Reduced 11 CG Triumvirate
3Bold 15 7 pt. CG Triumvirate
4OCRA-like 16 9 pt. CG Triumvirate
5HR1 17 11 pt. CG Triumvirate
6HR2 18 15 pt. CG Triumvirate
50 EFF Swiss Bold (TrueType Scalable)
3-4 Defining Fields

Or a valid downloaded font selector number.
Fonts 5 and 6 are for numeric data only.
The 9403 supports fonts 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, and 11.
The CG Triumvirate fonts support only the ANSI and DOS
Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets. The scalable font does
not support Code Page 1256 (Arabic). See Appendix C for
more information.
T9. hgt mag Height magnifier, 1-7 times (4-255 for scalable/downloaded
TrueType fonts). Use a magnifier of 1 with proportionally
spaced fonts, because characters lose smoothness at higher
magnifications. See Appendix B, "Fonts," for more
information about fonts.
T10. wid mag Width magnifier, 1-7 times (4-255 for scalable/downloaded
TrueType fonts). Proportionally spaced fonts do not have a
set width. To estimate the size of your field, use the letter "W"
for the widest field or an "L" for an average width field. Find
your selected font and the desired width in Appendix B,
"Fonts."
NOTE: To use large point sizes (greater than 60 point), you
must reconfigure memory and increase the size of
the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.
T11. color Options for standard printer fonts:
BOpaque, Normal, Black, Normal
D/R/W Opaque, Normal, White, Normal
OTransparent, Normal, Black, Normal
Options for the Scalable Font:
A/N Transparent, Normal, Black, Bold
B/O Transparent, Normal, Black, Normal
D/W Opaque, Normal, White, Normal
E/S Transparent, Italics, Black, Bold
F/T Transparent, Italics, Black, Normal
There are two types of field color overlay attributes:
Transparent The overlay field (text or constant text) does
not block out (or "erase") existing fields.
Opaque The overlay field blocks out (or "erases")
existing fields.
Line field
blocked out by
opaque field
using attribute B
Line field not
blocked out by
transparent field
using attribute O
Defining Fields 3-5

Field placement in the packet is an important consideration
when using field color attributes, because fields are imaged in
the order they are received. If a line field is defined before
the overlay (text or constant text) field, the line field is
blocked out by the overlay field, depending on the overlay
field’s color attribute. If a line field is defined after the overlay
field, the line field is not blocked out by the overlay field,
regardless of the overlay field’s color attribute.
T12. alignment Options:
LAlign on left side of field.
CCenter text within field (monospaced fonts only)
RAlign on right side of field (monospaced fonts only)
BAlign at midpoint of field
EAlign at endpoint of the field
Use L, B, or E for any font.
T13. char rot Character rotation. The field or supply does not rotate, only
the characters do. Options:
0Top of character points to top of field
(Use for scalable font)
1Top of character points to left of field
2Top of character points to bottom of field
3Top of character points to right of field
NOTE: Font 50 and downloaded TrueType fonts do not
support character rotation.
T14. field rot Field rotation. Field rotation rotates the whole field, not just
the characters. Rotation is affected by the pivot point, which
varies depending on how text is justified. Lower left corner of
field is the pivot point. Options:
0Top of field points to top of supply
1Top of field points to left of supply
2Top of field points to bottom of supply
3Top of field points to right of supply
3-6 Defining Fields

T15. sym set Symbol set. Options:
0Internal Symbol Set
1ANSI Symbol Set
100 Macintosh
101 Wingdings
102 UNICODE (user input) for particular mapping
103 BIG5 (user input) for UNICODE mapping
104 GB2312 (user input) for UNICODE mapping
105 SJIS (user input) for UNICODE mapping
Code Page 932 (Japanese Shift-JIS)
106 GB2312 (user input) for GB23212 mapping
Code Page 936 (Simplified Chinese)
107 BIG5 (user input) for BIG5 mapping
Code Page 950 (Traditional Chinese)
437 DOS Code Page 437 (Domestic)
850 DOS Code Page 850 (International)
852 DOS Code Page 852 (Latin 2)
855 DOS Code Page 855 (Russian)
857 DOS Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish)
860 DOS Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese)
1250 Code Page 1250 (Latin 2)
1251 Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic)
1252 Code Page 1252 (Latin 1)
1253 Code Page 1253 (Greek)
1254 Code Page 1254 (Turkish)
1255 Code Page 1255 (Hebrew)
1256 Code Page 1256 (Arabic)
1257 Code Page 1257 (Baltic)
1258 Code Page 1258 (Vietnamese)
The CG Triumvirate fonts support only the ANSI and DOS
Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets. The scalable font does
not support Code Page 1256 (Arabic). See Appendix C,
"Symbol Sets/ Code Pages" for more information. Code
pages 852-860 and 1250-1258 may only be used with
downloaded TrueType fonts or the scalable font. Code Pages
932, 936, and 950 may only be used with downloaded
Double-byte fonts. TrueType fonts are designed to be
regionally specific; therefore, all code pages may not be
supported in a given font.
Example T,2,10,V,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
Defines a text field (field #2) with a variable length of up to 10
characters. The field begins at row 250, column 50. There is no
additional gap between characters, and the Standard font is used
without any additional magnification. The printing is black on
white and centered. No field or character rotation is used.
Defining Fields 3-7

The internal symbol set is used.
Defining Bar Code Fields
Each bar code field requires a separate definition.
Syntax B,field#,# of char,fix/var,row,column,
font,density,height,text,alignment,
field rot p
B1. B Bar Code Field.
B2. field# Unique number from 0-999 (0-99 for 9403) to identify this field.
B3. # of char Maximum number of characters. If the bar code uses a check
digit, allow an extra character for the check digit. The actual
maximum number of characters is limited by the size of the
label and bar code density. Range: 0-2710 (0-100 for 9403).
Data Matrix can use up to 2710 numeric characters or 2335
alphanumeric characters. Quick Response (QR Code) can
use 299-2710 characters. See Appendix A, "Samples" for
more information.
B4. fix/var Fixed (F) or variable (V) length field.
Bar Code Number of Characters Fixed or
Variable
UPCA 12 F
UPCA+2 14 F
UPCA+5 17 F
UPCA+Price CD 12 F
UPCE 7F
UPCE+2 9F
UPCE+5 12 F
EAN8 8F
EAN8+2 10 F
EAN8+5 13 F
EAN13 13 F
EAN13+2 15 F
EAN13+5 18 F
EAN13+Price CD 13 F
POSTNET 9 or 11 F
3-8 Defining Fields

Bar Code Number of Characters Fixed or
Variable
Interleaved 2 of 5
or
Interleaved I 2 of 5 with
Barrier Bar
0 to 2710 V
Code 39 or MOD43 0 to 2710 V
Codabar (NW7) depends on application F or V
Code 128 0 to 2710 V
Code 16K 0 to 2710 V
Code 93 0 to 2710 V
MSI 0 to 14 F or V
PDF417 0 to 2710 V
MaxiCode* 0 to 93 (alphanumeric)
0 to 128 (numeric) V
Data Matrix* 0 to 2335 (alphanumeric)
0 to 2710 (numeric) V
Quick Response* 1167 to 2710 (numeric)
707 to 2710 (alphanumeric) V
* For the 9403 printer, use the 2D bar codes online. For more information about
MaxiCode, Data Matrix, and Quick Response, see Appendix A, "Samples."
B5. row Distance from bottom of the print area to the pivot point of the
field. The pivot point varies, depending on how the field is
justified. Pivot points:
Left/Center/Right-Justified Fields
Balanced Fields End-Justified Fields
Defining Fields 3-9

Remember to include text or numbers
that may appear with the bar code for
the row measurement.
Printer Unit of Measure Row or
End Row
Column or
End Column
9403
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-599
0-1523
0-1217
0-199
0-507
0-405
9825/
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4063
0-3247
0-399
0-1015
0-811
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3047
0-3599
0-399
0-1015
0-1199
B6. column Distance from the lower left edge of the print area to the pivot
point. Use the previous table for values.
NOTE: Allow a minimum of 1/10 inch
between the scan edge of bar
code and label edges or other data.
If using the optional verifier, allow a minimum of 1.3
inches (33 mm) between the bar code and the top of
the label. See "Determining the Print Area" in
Chapter 1 for more information.
3-10 Defining Fields

B7. font Bar code. Options:
1UPCA
2UPCE
3Interleaved 2 of 5
4Code 39 (no check digit)
5Codabar
6EAN8
7EAN13
8Code 128
9MSI
10 UPCA +2
11 UPCA +5
12 UPCE +2
13 UPCE +5
14 EAN8 +2
15 EAN8 +5
16 EAN13 +2
17 EAN13 +5
22 POSTNET
23 Code 93
31 Code 16K
32 PDF417
33 MaxiCode
35 Data Matrix (ECC-200)
36 Quick Response
40 Code 39 (MOD 43 check digit)
41 UPCA & Price CD
44 EAN13 & Price CD
50 Interleaved 2 of 5 with Barrier Bar
B8. density Bar code density. Use the following table for the bar code
density.
Defining Fields 3-11

203 DPI Barcode Densities
Bar code
Ty p e
Density
Selector
Density
(% or cpi)
Narrow
Element
(dots/mils)
Narrow to
Wide Ratio
Data
Length
Appearance
Codes
Available
Char
Set
UPCA +2/+5
Price CD
2
4
76%
114%
2/9.9
3/14.8
1.0:1 11 or 12
14/17
1, 5, 6, 7 or 8 0 to 9
UPCE
+2/+5
2
4
76%
114%
2/9.9
3/14.8
1.0:1 6 or 7
9/12
1, 5, 6, 7 or 8 0 to 9
EAN8
+2/+5
2
4
76%
114%
2/9.9
3/14.8
1.0:1 7 or 8
10/13
1, 5, 6,7 or 8 0 to 9
EAN13+2/+5
Price CD
2
4
76%
114%
2/9.9
3/14.8
1.0:1 12 or 13
15/18
1, 5, 6,7 or 8 0 to 9
Interleaved
2 of 5
or I2of5
with Barrier
Bar
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1.1
2.1
3.2
4.2
5.6
6.3
7.5
8.8
9.6
11.2
11.0
12.7
14.5
21/103.4
12/59.1
7/34.5
6/29.6
4/19.7
4/19.7
3/14.8
3/14.8
3/14.8
2/9.9
2/9.9
2/9.9
2/9.9
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.3
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.0
0 to 2710 8 0 to 9
(Code 39 or
MOD43
(Extended
Code 39)
1
2
3
4
6
7
11
12
20
1.4
1.7
3.5
4.2
6.3
7.0
3.9
12.7
3.0
10/49.3
8/39.4
4/19.7
3/14.8
2/9.9
2/9.9
4/19.7
1/4.9
5/24.6
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:2.2
0 to 2710 8 SPACE
$%*+-./
0 to 9
A to Z
Codabar
(NW7)
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
2.1
3.0
4.6
5.1
8.4
9.2
10.1
8/39.4
6/29.6
4/19.7
4/19.7
2/9.9
2/9.9
2/9.9
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.0
0 to 26 8 $+-./
0 to 9
a to d
Code 128 or
Code 16 K
20
4
6
8
3.5/7.0
4.4/8.7
5.8/11.7
8.7/17.5
5/24.6
4/19.7
3/14.8
2/9.9
N/A 0 to 2710 8 00H to 7FH
NOTE: The start (*) and stop (+) characters are automatically added for Code 39. Code 39,
density 12, produces a one-dot narrow bar. This density is intended for special
U.S.P.S. ACT-tag applications only. Synthetic supplies are recommended to produce
scannable bar codes.
3-12 Defining Fields

Bar Code
Ty p e
Density
Selector
Data Length
Quick Response
(QR Code) Models 1 and 2 0Model 1: 0-1167 Numeric; 0-707
Alphanumeric; 0-486 (8-Bit); 0-299 Kanji
Model 2: 0-2710 Numeric; Alphanumeric and
8-Bit; 0-1817 Kanji
NOTE: Values in bold indicate the default.
Bar code
Ty p e
Density
Selector
Density
(% or cpi)
Narrow
Element
(dots/mils)
Narrow to
Wide Ratio
Data
Length
Appearance
Codes
Available
Char Set
CODE 93 3
4
5
7
10
3.7
4.5
5.6
7.5
11.2
6/29.6
5/24.6
4/19.7
3/14.8
2/9.9
N/A 0 to 2710 8 00H to
7FH
MSI 4
5
7
4.2
5.6
7.2
4/19.7
3/14.8
2/9.9
1:2.0
1:2.0
1:2.5
0 to 14 8 0 to 9
Bar code
Ty p e
Density
Selector
Density
(% or cpi)
Narrow
Element
(dots/mils)
Narrow to
Wide Ratio
Data
Length
Appearance
Codes
Available
Char Set
POSTNET 0 (fixed at
4.3 cpi)
24/118.2 10/49.3 4/19.7 (5
dot gap)
0,5,6,9 or
11
8 0 to 9
MaxiCode 7 N/A N/A N/A 99 8 00H to
FFH
Bar code
Ty p e
Density
Selector
Element
Width
(dot/mils)
Row Height
(dots/mils)
Aspect
Ratio
Data
Length
Appearance
Codes
Available
Char Set
PDF417 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2/9.8
2/9.8
2/9.8
3/14.8
3/14.8
3/14.8
4/19.7
4/19.7
4/19.7
2/9.8
4/19.7
6/29.6
3/14.8
6/29.6
9/44.3
4/19.7
8/39.4
12/59.1
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:1
1:2
1:3
0 to 2709 8 00H to
FFH
Defining Fields 3-13

203 DPI Barcode Densities
Bar Code Size
Row x Col.
Density
Selector
Max. Data
Length
Num. X
Alphanum.
App
Code
Char
Set
Data Matrix
Square
symbols
10 x 10
12 x 12
14 x 14
16 x 16
18 x 18
20 x 20
22 x 22
24 x 24
26 x 26
32 x 32
36 x 36
40 x 40
44 x 44
48 x 48
52 x 52
64 x 64
72 x 72
80 x 80
88 x 88
96 x 96
104 x 104
120 x 120
132 x 132
144 x 144
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
6 x 3
10 x 6
16 x 10
24 x 16
36 x 25
44 x 31
60 x 43
72 x 52
88 x 64
124 x 91
172 x 127
228 x 169
288 x 214
348 x 259
408 x 304
560 x 418
736 x 550
912 x 682
1152 x 862
1392 x 1042
1632 x 1222
2100 x 1573
2608 x 1954
2710 x 2335
8 00H to FFH
0 default (bar code size automatically determined by data)
Bar Code Size
Row x Col.
Density
Selector
Max. Data
Length
Num. X
Alphanum.
App
Code
Char
Set
Data Matrix
Rectangular
symbols
8 x 18
8 x 32
12 x 26
12 x 36
16 x 36
16 x 48
25
26
27
28
29
30
10 x 6
20 x 13
32 x 22
44 x 31
64 x 46
98 x 72
8 00H to FFH
0 default (bar code size automatically determined by data)
NOTE: For the Data Matrix symbol, the 9825 and 9850 printers support printing
an X-dimension of 13 mils or greater (3 dots @203 dpi). If you use a
denser bar code, make sure the bar code scans in your particular
application. Monarch "premium" supplies and increasing the print
contrast are recommended for denser bar codes. Depending on your
application, additional densities are available.
3-14 Defining Fields

300 DPI Barcode Densities
Bar code
Ty p e
Density
Selector
Density
(% or cpi)
Narrow
Element
(dots/mils)
Narrow to
Wide Ratio
Data
Length
Appearance
Codes
Available
Char
Set
UPCA +2/+5
Price CD
2
4
77%
103%
3/10
4/13.3
1:2.0 11 or 12
14/17
1, 5, 6, 7 or 8 0 to 9
UPCE
+2/+5
2
4
77%
103%
3/10
4/13.3
1:2.0 6 or 7
9/12
1, 5, 6, 7 or 8 0 to 9
EAN8
+2/+5
2
4
77%
103%
3/10
4/13.3
1:2.0 7 or 8
10/13
1, 5, 6,7 or 8 0 to 9
EAN13+2/+5
Price CD
2
4
77%
103%
3/10
4/13.3
1:2.0 12 or 13
15/18
1, 5, 6,7 or 8 0 to 9
Interleaved
2 of 5
or I2of5
with Barrier
Bar
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1.1
2.1
3.3
4.2
5.6
6.2
8.3
9.4
9.9
11.1
11.1
13.0
14.3
31/103.4
18/60.1
10/33.4
9/30.0
6/20.0
6/20.0
4/13.3
4/13.3
4/13.3
3/10.0
3/10.0
3/10.0
3/10.0
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.4
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:2.5
1:2.3
1:3.0
1:3.0
1:2.3
1:2.0
0 to 2710 8 0 to 9
(Code 39 or
MOD43
(Extended
Code 39)
1
2
3
4
6
7
11
12
20
1.4
1.7
3.4
4.7
6.2
7.1
3.8
11.5
3.1
15/50.0
12/40/0
6/20.0
4/13.3
3/10.0
3/10.0
6/20.0
2/6.7
7/23.4
1:2.5
1:2.3
1:2.5
1:3.0
1:3.0
1:2.3
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:2.3
0 to 2710 8 SPACE
$%*+-./
0 to 9
A to Z
Codabar
(NW7)
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
2.3
3.4
5.0
5.6
9.1
10.4
11.1
12/40.0
9/30.0
6/20.0
6/20.0
3/10.0
3/10.0
3/10.0
1:3.0
1:2.4
1:2.5
1:2.0
1:3.0
1:2.3
1:2.0
0 to 2710 8 $+-./
0 to 9
a to d
Code 128 or
Code 16 K
4
6
8
20
4.5
6.8
9.1
3.9
6/20.0
4/13.3
3/10.0
7/23.4
N/A 0 to 2710 8 00H to 7FH
NOTE: The start (*) and stop (+) characters are automatically added for Code 39. Code 39,
density 12, produces a one-dot narrow bar. This density is intended for special U.S.P.S.
ACT-tag applications only. Synthetic supplies are recommended to produce scannable
bar codes.
Defining Fields 3-15

Bar Code
Ty p e
Density
Selector
Data Length
Quick Response
(QR Code) Models 1 and 2 0Model 1: 0-1167 Numeric; 0-707
Alphanumeric; 0-486 (8-Bit); 0-299 Kanji
Model 2: 0-2710 Numeric; Alphanumeric and
8-Bit; 0-1817 Kanji
NOTE: Values in bold indicate the default.
Bar code
Ty p e
Density
Selector
Density
(% or cpi)
Narrow
Element
(dots/mils)
Narrow to
Wide Ratio
Data
Length
Appearance
Codes
Available
Char Set
CODE 93 3
4
5
7
10
3.7
4.8
5.6
8.3
11.1
9/30.0
7/23.4
6/20.0
4/13.3
3/10.0
N/A 0 to 2710 8 00H to
7FH
MSI 4
5
7
4.2
6.2
7.5
6/20.0
4/13.3
3/10.0
1:2.0
1:2.0
1:2.3
0 to 2710 8 0 to 9
Bar code
Ty p e
Density
Selector
Density
(% or cpi)
Narrow
Element
(dots/mils)
Narrow to
Wide Ratio
Data
Length
Appearance
Codes
Available
Char Set
POSTNET 0 (fixed at
4.2 cpi)
24/118.2 15/50.0 6/20.0 (5
dot gap)
0,5,6,9 or
11
8 0 to 9
MaxiCode 7 N/A N/A N/A 99 8 00H to
FFH
Bar code
Ty p e
Density
Selector
Element
Width
(dot/mils)
Row Height
(dots/mils)
Aspect
Ratio
Data
Length
Appearance
Codes
Available
Char Set
PDF417 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3/10.0
3/10.0
3/10.0
4/13.3
4/13.3
4/13.3
6/20.0
6/20.0
6/20.0
3/10.0
6/20.0
9/30.0
4/13.3
9/30.0
12/40.0
6/20.0
12/40.0
18/60.0
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:1
1:2
1:3
1:1
1:2
1:3
0 to 2709 8 00H to
FFH
3-16 Defining Fields

Bar Code Size
Row x Col.
Density
Selector
Max. Data
Length
Num. X
Alphanum.
App
Code
Char
Set
Data Matrix
Square
symbols
10 x 10
12 x 12
14 x 14
16 x 16
18 x 18
20 x 20
22 x 22
24 x 24
26 x 26
32 x 32
36 x 36
40 x 40
44 x 44
48 x 48
52 x 52
64 x 64
72 x 72
80 x 80
88 x 88
96 x 96
104 x 104
120 x 120
132 x 132
144 x 144
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
6 x 3
10 x 6
16 x 10
24 x 16
36 x 25
44 x 31
60 x 43
72 x 52
88 x 64
124 x 91
172 x 127
228 x 169
288 x 214
348 x 259
408 x 304
560 x 418
736 x 550
912 x 682
1152 x 862
1392 x 1042
1632 x 1222
2100 x 1573
2608 x 1954
2710 x 2335
8 00H to FFH
0 default (bar code size automatically determined by data)
Bar Code Size
Row x Col.
Density
Selector
Max. Data
Length
Num. X
Alphanum.
App
Code
Char
Set
Data Matrix
Rectangular
symbols
8 x 18
8 x 32
12 x 26
12 x 36
16 x 36
16 x 48
25
26
27
28
29
30
10 x 6
20 x 13
32 x 22
44 x 31
64 x 46
98 x 72
8 00H to FFH
0 default (bar code size automatically determined by data)
NOTE: For the Data Matrix symbol, the 9825 and 9850 printers support printing
an X-dimension of 13 mils or greater (3 dots @203 dpi). If you use a
denser bar code, make sure the bar code scans in your particular
application. Monarch "premium" supplies and increasing the print
contrast are recommended for denser bar codes. Depending on your
application, additional densities are available.
Defining Fields 3-17

B9. height Bar code height, in 1/100 inches, 1/10 mm, or dots. Minimum
values:
English 19
Metric 48
203 Dots 38
300 Dots 57
POSTNET, PDF417, and MaxiCode bar codes have a fixed
height. Always use 0 for these bar codes.
For Data Matrix and QR Code, the printer determines the size
of the symbol, but the user’s scanner determines the
functional size (minimum height) of the symbol. Small Data
Matrix and QR Codes may not be scannable. The Data Matrix
and QR Code’s height depends on the number entered for this
parameter. For example, if you select 80, the symbol could be
smaller than 0.80," but it will not be greater than the amount
specified in this parameter. The symbol arranges the data
according to rows and columns within the specified height.
NOTE: If using the optional verifier, allow the following
minimum bar code heights: 0.35" (English) for 4.0
ips; 0.50" (English) for 6.0 ips; 0.70" (English) for 8.0
ips; 0.95" (English) for 10.0 ips.
B10. text Appearance of text with bar code. For UPC and EAN only use
0-7. For all others, use 8, except where noted. Options:
0Default
MaxiCode Mode 0 (obsolete)
QR Code Model 2
1No check digit or number system
QR Code Model 1
2MaxiCode Mode 2 (Numeric Postal Code)
QR Code Model 2
3MaxiCode Mode 3 (Alphanumeric Postal Code)
5Number system at bottom, no check digit
6Check digit at bottom, no number system
7Check digit and number system at bottom
8No text, bar code only
MaxiCode (autodetect modes 0, 2, or 3)
NOTE: Data Matrix must use 8.
B11. alignment Choose L, R, C, B or E to align the bar code data correctly in
the field. B centers variable width bar codes, which may not
allow pad-character centering (Code 128, Code 39, etc.) E
right justifies variable width bar codes. MaxiCode, Data
Matrix, and QR Code must use L.
3-18 Defining Fields

B12. field rot Field rotation. Field rotation rotates the whole field, not just
the characters. Rotation is affected by the pivot point, which
varies depending on how text is justified. Lower left corner of
field is the pivot point. Options:
0Top of field points to top of supply
(Use for Maxicode)
1Top of field points to left of supply
2Top of field points to bottom of supply
3Top of field points to right of supply
NOTE: Serial bar codes with an 8-dot narrow element do not
automatically print at 2.5 IPS. Serial bar codes
printed at speeds greater than 2.5 IPS may not scan
properly.
Example B,3,12,V,150,40,1,2,80,7,L,0 p
Defines a bar code field (field #3) with 12 characters of variable
length starting at row 150, column 40. A UPCA bar code with a
density of 2 and a height of 80 is used. The check digit and
number system are shown at the bottom. The bar code is left
aligned without any field rotation.
Defining Non-Printable Text Fields
Non-printable text fields allow you to enter data without printing it
in its entered form. Typically, non-printable fields "hold" data that
later combines with other fields to form a merged field. Define
non-printable text fields before you define the field where the
information prints.
When you copy this field into another field, the maximum number
of characters for the final field is 2710 (or 0-100 for 9403). Allow
only as many characters as you need, because extra characters
use up space. Also, if you are copying into a bar code field, the
maximum number of characters in the destination bar code is
determined by the bar code specification (UPCA-12, EAN-13,
etc.). You need to apply field options to manipulate the text
entered in this field. For example, you may want to copy data
from this field into another field. See "Option 4 Copy Data" in
Chapter 4 for more information.
Defining Fields 3-19

In the following example, data is entered into four non-printable
fields and merged to form field 5, and is then printed as a bar
code. See "Merging Fields" in Chapter 4 for more information.
Field Data Field Type
1 20374 Non-printable
2 339 Non-printable
3 8 Non-printable
4 15 Non-printable
5 20374339815 Bar Code
Each non-printable text field requires a separate definition.
Syntax D,field#,# of char p
D1. D Non-Printable Text Field.
D2. field# Unique number from 0-999 (0-99 for 9403) assigned to this
field.
D3. # of char Maximum number of characters in this field: 0-2710 or (0-100
for 9403).
Example D,4,20 p
Defines a non-printable text field (field #4) with a maximum of 20
characters.
Defining Constant Text Fields
A constant text field is a set of fixed characters that prints on all
labels. Define each constant text field separately. This field is
not assigned a field number, but is counted as a field (keep this in
mind, as the printer allows a maximum of 1000 fields or 100 for
9403 printer per format). The characters in this field cannot be
changed by batch data. Field options do not apply to constant
text fields. Mark the pivot point of your field. This will vary,
depending on how your field is justified.
3-20 Defining Fields

Syntax C,row,column,gap,font,hgt mag,
wid mag,color,alignment,char rot,
field rot,"fixed char",sym set p
C1. C Constant Text Field.
C2. row For monospaced fonts, distance from bottom of print area to
the pivot point. For proportionally spaced fonts, distance from
bottom of print area to baseline of characters in the field.
(Bottom exits the printer first.)
Printer Unit of Measure Row or
End Row
Column or
End Column
9403
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-599
0-1523
0-1217
0-199
0-507
0-405
9825/
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4063
0-3247
0-399
0-1015
0-811
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3047
0-3599
0-399
0-1015
0-1199
C3. column Distance from the lower left edge of the print area to the pivot
point. Use the previous table for values.
C4. gap Number of dots between characters. Range: 0-99 dots.
Any number other than 0 or the default number affects your
field width. Default spacing:
Standard 3 dots
Reduced 1 dot
Bold 3 dots
OCRA-like 3 dots
CG Triumvirate Bold varies with each letter
CG Triumvirate varies with each letter
C5. font Style of font. Options:
1Standard 10 CG Triumvirate Bold
2Reduced 11 CG Triumvirate
3Bold 15 7 pt. CG Triumvirate
4OCRA-like 16 9 pt. CG Triumvirate
5HR1 17 11 pt. CG Triumvirate
6HR2 18 15 pt. CG Triumvirate
50 EFF Swiss Bold (TrueType Scalable)
Defining Fields 3-21

Or a valid downloaded font selector number.
Fonts 5 and 6 are for numeric data only.
The 9403 supports fonts 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, and 11.
The CG Triumvirate fonts support only the ANSI and DOS
Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets. See Appendix C for
more information.
C6. hgt mag Height magnifier, 1-7 times (4-255 for scalable/downloaded
TrueType fonts). Use a magnifier of 1 with proportionally
spaced fonts, because characters lose smoothness at higher
magnifications. See Appendix B, "Fonts," for more
information about fonts.
C7. wid mag Width magnifier, 1-7 times (4-255 for scalable/downloaded
TrueType fonts). Proportionally spaced fonts do not have a
set width. To estimate the size of your field, use the letter "W"
for the widest field or an "L" for an average width field. Find
your selected font and the desired width in Appendix B,
"Fonts."
NOTE: To use larger point sizes (greater than 60), you must
reconfigure memory and increase the size of the
scalable (vector) fonts buffer.
C8. color Options for standard printer fonts:
BOpaque, Normal, Black, Normal
D/R/W Opaque, Normal, White, Normal
OTransparent, Normal, Black, Normal
Options for the Scalable Font:
A/N Transparent, Normal, Black, Bold
B/O Transparent, Normal, Black, Normal
D/W Opaque, Normal, White, Normal
E/S Transparent, Italics, Black, Bold
F/T Transparent, Italics, Black, Normal
There are two types of field color overlay attributes:
Transparent The overlay field (text or constant text) does
not block out (or "erase") existing fields.
Opaque The overlay field blocks out (or "erases")
existing fields.
3-22 Defining Fields

Field placement in the packet is an important consideration
when using field color attributes, because fields are imaged in
the order they are received. If a line field is defined before
the overlay (text or constant text) field, the line field is
blocked out by the overlay field, depending on the overlay
field’s color attribute. If a line field is defined after the overlay
field, the line field is not blocked out by the overlay field,
regardless of the overlay field’s color attribute.
C9. alignment Alignment of constant text in the field. Options:
LAlign on left side of field.
BAlign at midpoint of field
EAlign at end of field.
Use L, B, or E for any font.
C10. char rot Character rotation. Options:
0Top of character points to top of field
(Use for scalable font.)
1Top of character points to left of field
2Top of character points to bottom of field
3Top of character points to right of field
NOTE: Font 50 and downloaded TrueType fonts do not
support character rotation.
C11. field rot Field rotation. Lower left corner of field is the pivot point.
Options:
0Top of overlay points to top of supply
1Top of overlay points to left of supply
2Top of overlay points to bottom of supply
3Top of overlay points to right of supply
NOTE: Rotation is affected by the pivot point, which varies
depending on how text is justified.
C12. "fixed char" Fixed characters to appear in the field. Maximum 2710 (100
for 9403) characters. Enclose in quotation marks.
Defining Fields 3-23

C13. sym set Symbol set. Options:
0Internal Symbol Set
1ANSI Symbol Set
100 Macintosh
101 Wingdings
102 UNICODE (user input) for particular mapping
103 BIG5 (user input) for UNICODE mapping
104 GB2312 (user input) for UNICODE mapping
105 SJIS (user input) for UNICODE mapping
Code Page 932 (Japanese Shift-JIS)
106 GB2312 (user input) for GB23212 mapping
Code Page 936 (Simplified Chinese)
107 BIG5 (user input) for BIG5 mapping
Code Page 950 (Traditional Chinese)
437 DOS Code Page 437 (Domestic)
850 DOS Code Page 850 (International)
852 DOS Code Page 852 (Latin 2)
855 DOS Code Page 855 (Russian)
857 DOS Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish)
860 DOS Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese)
1250 Code Page 1250 (Latin 2)
1251 Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic)
1252 Code Page 1252 (Latin 1)
1253 Code Page 1253 (Greek)
1254 Code Page 1254 (Turkish)
1255 Code Page 1255 (Hebrew)
1256 Code Page 1256 (Arabic)
1257 Code Page 1257 (Baltic)
1258 Code Page 1258 (Vietnamese)
The CG Triumvirate fonts support only the ANSI and DOS
Code Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets. The scalable font does
not support Code Page 1256 (Arabic). See Appendix C,
"Symbol Sets/ Code Pages" for more information. Code
pages 852-860 and 1250-1258 may only be used with
downloaded TrueType fonts or the scalable font. Code Pages
932, 936, and 950 may only be used with downloaded
Double-byte fonts. TrueType fonts are designed to be
regionally specific; therefore, all code pages may not be
supported in a given font.
Example C,30,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MADE IN USA",0 p
Defines a constant text field starting at row 30, column 10. It
does not have any additional inter-character gap. The Standard
font is used without any additional magnification. The printing is
black on white and left justified. No field or character rotation is
3-24 Defining Fields

used. "MADE IN USA" is printed in this field. The internal symbol
set is used.
Defining Line Fields
Use lines to form borders and mark out original prices. Define
each line separately. This field is not assigned a field number, but
is counted as a field (keep this in mind, as the printer allows a
maximum of 1000 fields or 100 for 9403 printer per format). You
can define any line length and a thickness up to 99 dots, as long
as the solid black print does not exceed 30 percent of any given
square inch of the label.
Line Types
You can create horizontal and vertical lines. Define lines as
Segments Choose starting point and ending point.
Vectors Choose starting point, angle, and length of
line.
Syntax L,type,row,column,angle/end row,length/
end col,thickness,"pattern" p
L1. L Line Field.
L2. type Type of line. Only vertical and horizontal lines are
supported. Options:
SSegment. Choose starting
point and ending point.
VVector. Choose starting
point, angle, and length.
L3. row Distance from bottom of print area to
the starting point.
Defining Fields 3-25

Printer Unit of Measure Row or
End Row
Column or
End Column
9403
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-599
0-1523
0-1217
0-199
0-507
0-405
9825/
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4063
0-3247
0-399
0-1015
0-811
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3047
0-3599
0-399
0-1015
0-1199
L4. column Distance from left edge of the print area
to line origin. Use the previous table for
values.
L5. angle/
end row
If Using Segments
Row location of ending point. Measure
from bottom of print area. Ranges same
as row above. On horizontal lines, this
value must match item L3.
If Using Vectors
Angle of line. Options: 0, 90,
180, or 270.
L6. length/
end col
If Using Segments
Column location of end point. Measure
from left edge of print area. Ranges same
as column above. On vertical lines, this
value must match parameter L4.
If Using Vectors
Length of the line in selected units. Use the previous table for
values.
3-26 Defining Fields

L7. thickness Using the chart below for reference, write the desired line
thickness (1 to 99) in box L7. Measured in dots.
NOTE: Line thickness fills upward on horizontal lines, or to
the right on vertical lines.
L8. "pattern" Line pattern. Enter "".
Example L,S,110,30,110,150,10,"" p
Defines a horizontal line field as a segment starting at row 110,
column 30 and ending at row 110, column 150. The line
thickness is 10 dots.
Defining Box Fields
Use boxes to form borders or highlight items of interest. Define
each box field separately. This field is not assigned a field
number, but is counted as a field (keep this in mind, as the printer
allows a maximum of 1000 fields or 100 for 9403 printer per
format). You can define any line length and a thickness up to 99
dots, as long as the solid black print does not exceed 30 percent
of any given square inch of the label.
Defining Fields 3-27

Syntax Q,row,column,end row,end col,thickness,
"pattern" p
Q1. Q Box (Quadrilateral) Field.
Q2. row Distance from bottom of print area to
lower left corner of box.
Printer Unit of Measure Row or
End Row
Column or
End Column
9403
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-599
0-1523
0-1217
0-199
0-507
0-405
9825/
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4063
0-3247
0-399
0-1015
0-811
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3047
0-3599
0-399
0-1015
0-1199
Q3. column Distance from left edge of print area to
lower left corner of box.
Use the previous table for values.
Q4. end row Distance from bottom of print area to
upper right corner of box.
Ranges same as row.
Q5. end col Distance from left edge of print area
to upper right corner of box. Ranges
same as column.
3-28 Defining Fields

Q6. thickness Using the chart below for reference, write the desired line
thickness (1 to 99) in box Q6. Measured in dots.
NOTE: Boxes fill inward, so make sure your boxes do not
overwrite other fields.
Q7. "pattern" Line pattern. Enter "".
Example Q,240,30,270,150,3,"" p
Defines a box field starting at row 240, column 30. It ends at row
270, column 150. It has a thickness of 3 dots.
Defining Fields 3-29

3-30 Defining Fields

DEFINING FIELD OPTIONS 4
This chapter provides a reference for defining
Nfield options in formats
Ncheck digit packets.
When using multiple options on the 9403 printer,
remember that options are processed in the
order they are received.
Defining Field Options 4-1

Applying Field Options
Field options further define text, bar code, and non-printable text
fields. The text, constant text, or bar code field must be
previously defined before you can apply any field option to it.
Define options immediately after the field to which they apply.
Combining Field Options
You can use more than one option with most fields. For example,
you can use Option 4 to copy data from another field, and then
use Option 30 to pad the field. When you use multiple options for
the same field, you must place the options in the order you want
to apply them to your format.
Restrictions
Some options cannot be used together. For example,
incrementing (Option 60) and price field (Option 42) options
cannot be applied to the same field. Refer to the following
sections addressing individual options for specific combinations to
avoid.
Option 4 (copy a field) is the only option that can be repeated for
a single field.
Example R,1,3,1,3,1,1 p
Syntax R,option#,parameter...parameter p
R1. R Indicates field option header.
R2. option# Option number:
1Define fixed characters
2Data type restrictions (9403/9850)
3Data entry template (9403/9850
4Copy data from previous field
5Define data entry sources (9403/9850)
4-2 Defining Field Options

20 Define data entry prompts (9403/9850)
30 Pad data to left or right with specified character
31 Generate check digit
42 Format as a price field
50 Define bar code densities
51 Define security and truncation of PDF417 bar codes
52 Define width or length of PDF417 bar codes
60 Define incrementing or decrementing field
61 Reimage fields
R3. parameter(s) Varies per option. See the following option descriptions.
Option 1 (Fixed Data)
Fixed data is information (a company name or store number) you
want to print on all labels. You can define fixed characters for an
entire field or for part of a field.
Syntax R,1,"fixed char" p
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 1 Option 1.
R3. fixed char Characters to insert. Enclose in quotation marks. If you are
defining fixed characters for part of a field, place underscores
(_) in non-fixed positions. Any spaces in the phrase are fixed
characters. Range: 0 - 2710 (or 0 - 100 for 9403)
NOTE: Underscore characters are stripped out and the data
is compressed if no data is supplied by the batch and
the field length is variable.
Example R,1,"_ _ _%$_ _ _ _ _" p
Uses fixed characters (%$) in positions four and five. The other
positions are variable.
Example R,1,"MONARCH" p
"MONARCH" appears as a fixed field in this example.
To fill in the non-fixed portion of the field, see "Defining Batch
Data Fields" in Chapter 6. As an alternative, you can apply
Option 4 to copy data into the non-fixed character positions.
Defining Field Options 4-3

Option 2 (Data Type Restrictions)
This option restricts the data type for a particular field. You can
use Options 2 or 3 only once per field. Do not use with Option 3
(Data Entry Templates).
Option 2 is only available on the 9403 and
9850 printers. You must use the Monarch
917 keypad with the 9850 printer for offline
data entry.
If you do batch entry only in the batch packet, you do not need to
apply Options 2 and 3. Use these options only for offline batch
entry.
Syntax R,2,char_code p
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 2 Option 2.
R3. char code Character type for the field. Options:
1Numeric only (0..9)
2Letters only (A..Z,a..z)
3Symbols only (printable characters other than letters
or numbers)
4Letters and numbers only
5Numbers and symbols only
6Letters and symbols only
Spaces are permitted in all categories. You can also use a
combination of any two (letter, numbers, or symbols)
character types.
A use for this option is a quantity field, where
the operator could enter only numeric data.
Example R,2,2 p
Restricts the field data to letters only (A-Z or a-z).
4-4 Defining Field Options

Option 3 (Data Entry Templates)
This option provides more specific restrictions than Option 2.
This option can be used to select certain letters (such as A
through F or the numbers 1 through 4) from a character set. You
can also use this option to create a template of allowable
characters for a field. Do not use with Option 2 (Data Type
Restrictions).
Use this option only for offline batch entry. You can define a
template up to 30 characters long, but the printer only displays 16
characters at a time. The character template must contain the
same number of characters as the field.
Option 3 is only available on the 9403 and
9850 printers. You must use the 917 keypad
with the 9850 printer for offline data entry.
Syntax R,3,code,chars p
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 3 Option 3.
R3. code Data types. Options
SDefines a specific set of characters for the entire
field. The string length does not have to match the
field length. Maximum is 30 characters.
TCreates a template of allowable data types by placing
character indicators in each character position. The
number of characters in the string must match the
length of the field.
NOTE: A sample use for this option is a field on a patient
record containing blood type. Acceptable characters
would be A, B, O, +, or -.
R4. chars Characters to include in a field or a specific template. Must
be enclosed within quotation marks. Indicators can be
*any printable character
#any digit 0-9
@any letter a-z, A-Z
-no user input for this position (for fixed data or
copied data)
Defining Field Options 4-5

Example R,3,S,"ABC1234567890" p
Restricts the field data to letters A, B, and C, and all digits.
Example R,3,T,"***#_ _ _ _" p
Creates a template that allows any printable character in
positions 1, 2, and 3; digits in position 4; and reserves positions 5
through 8 for fixed or copied data.
Example R,3,T,"####_ _ _ _" p
Creates a template that allows digits only in positions 1-4, and
reserves positions 5 through 8 for fixed or copied data.
Option 4 (Copy Data)
You can create a field that uses data from another field. This is
useful for creating merged fields or sub-fields. You can copy the
information from multiple fields into one field by applying the copy
procedure more than once. Copy data is the only option you can
apply to a field more than once.
The maximum number of characters defined in box T3 or B3 must
allow for the number of characters you will place in the field,
including any price, check digit, or fixed characters inserted by
the printer. The maximum number of characters in the field into
which data is copied cannot exceed 2710 (or 100 for the 9403
printer) or the maximum number of characters permitted by the
bar code.
When copying from more than one field, copy
into the destination field from left to right.
Syntax R,4,src fld,src start,# to copy,dest
start,copy code p
R1. R Field Option Header.
R2. 4 Option 4.
4-6 Defining Field Options

R3. src fld Field number from which data is copied. Range: 0 to 999
(or 0 to 99 for 9403)
R4. src start Position number in the source field of the first character to be
copied. Character positions are numbered 1 to 2710
(or 1 to 100 for 9403), starting from the left.
R5. # to copy Number of characters to copy. Range: 1 to 2710 (or 1 to 100
for 9403).
R6. dest start Position number where copied characters are to begin printing
in the destination field. Range: 1 to 2710
(or 1 to 100 for 9403).
R7. copy code Copy Method.
1Copy field as is (including price symbols,
pad characters, check digits, etc.).
2Copy unformatted data (without price characters,
pad characters, etc.).
Example R,4,3,1,3,1,1 p
Copies data from field #3, starting at the first position and copying
three characters. In the destination field, the information is
placed in position 1 and copied as formatted data.
Merging Fields
You can copy data to merge the contents of fields. Use the copy
data option as many times as necessary to copy all the
appropriate fields into the merged field.
In the following example, two text and two non-printable fields are
shown. Data from these fields is merged to form field 5, and is
then printed as a bar code.
Field Data Field Type
1 203 Non-printable
2 339 Non-printable
38 Text
4BLUE Text
5 2033398BLUE Bar Code
Defining Field Options 4-7

To create this sequence:
1. Define fields 1, 2, 3, and 4.
2. Define field 5 as a bar code. Allow enough characters in the
bar code field to hold all the copied characters.
3. Apply Option 4 to field 5 once for every source field.
Sub-Fields
You can copy a segment of data from one field into a new
location, called a sub-field. For example, extract part of the data
in a bar code and display it in text form in a sub-field. Then, use
the copy data option.
Option 5 (Define Data Entry Sources)
Defines how data is entered into a field. If the field holds all fixed
characters or copied data only, you can eliminate the operator
prompt. Use Option 5 only once per field. You must use the 917
keypad with the 9850 printer for offline data entry.
Option 5 is required for offline data entry on
the 9403 and 9850 printers.
Syntax R,5,code p
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 5 Option 5.
R3. code Input code for the data in the field. Options:
KKeypad
NNo user input for this field
Example R,5,K p
Allows data to be entered from the keypad.
Example R,5,N p
4-8 Defining Field Options

Eliminates the user prompt for this field. Data is either fixed or
copied from another source.
Option 20 (Define Data Entry Prompts)
This option defines the operator prompt and it is not
recommended on fields filled entirely by fixed characters or
copied data. This option must be defined before Option 5, or the
prompt will not display during data entry. You must use the
Monarch 917 keypad with the 9850 printer for offline data entry.
Option 20 is only available on the 9403 and
9850 printers.
Syntax R,20,"prompt" p
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 20 Option 20.
R3. "prompt" Displays the exact phrase you want to prompt the operator.
Must be enclosed within quotations. The prompt should be 15
characters or fewer.
Example R,20,"Order Number" p
Displays the prompt "Order Number" for the operator when this
field is imaged.
Option 30 (Padding Data)
You can add characters to one side of a field to "pad" the field.
Padding allows you to fill in the remaining spaces when the
entered data does not fill an entire field.
If a variable length field is not completely filled with batch data,
this option fills the remaining positions in the field with the
character designated by Option 30.
Syntax R,30,L/R,"character" p
Defining Field Options 4-9

R1. R Option Header.
R2. 30 Option 30.
R3. L/R Indicates type of padding
L Pad field on left side
R Pad field on right side
R4. "character" Pad character must be within the 0 - 255 decimal range and
enclosed inside quotation marks.
NOTE: Do not use on fixed length fields.
Example R,30,L,"X" p
Pads data with an "X" on the left side of the field.
Sample Use for Padding
If you have a variable length bar code that you want to occupy a
fixed amount of space on the supply, use pad characters. If the
maximum number of characters in the bar code is 15, but the
batch record only has 10 characters, the padding option fills the
remainder of the field with pad characters.
Option 31 (Calculate Check Digit)
The printer generates a check digit if you apply Option 31 to the
field. You cannot use this option if the field contains a UPC, EAN,
or Code 39 (with the MOD43 check digit) bar code.
Syntax R,31,gen/ver,check digit # p
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 31 Option 31.
R3. gen/ver Enter G to generate a check digit.
R4. check digit # Specifies a check digit scheme. Enter a number that
identifies a check digit scheme that has been defined. For
more information, see "Using Check Digits." Range: 1 - 10.
Example R,31,G,5 p
4-10 Defining Field Options

Generates a check digit using the previously defined check digit
scheme 5.
Option 42 (Price Field)
You can apply options that will insert monetary symbols
automatically. Do not use this option with Option 31 (define a
check digit) or Option 60 (increment or decrement a field). This
option is not recommended for bar codes. When determining the
maximum number of characters, add the maximum number of
digits and the monetary symbols.
Syntax R,42,appearance code p
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 42 Option 42.
R3. appearance
code
Enter 1 to print price field in standard notation, as defined by
country setting.
Use the monetary formatting packet to select monetary
notations and symbols by country setting. See "Defining the
Monetary Formatting Packet" for more information.
See Appendix C, "Symbol Sets/Code Pages," to make sure
the monetary symbol you want to use is printable in the font
selected for this field. For monetary symbols other than the
dollar sign, use the internal symbol set.
Example R,42,1 p
Uses a price field that prints the monetary symbol and notations
as defined in the monetary formatting packet.
Defining Field Options 4-11

Option 50 (Bar Code Density)
You can apply this option to bar code fields when you want to
create custom densities. When you apply this option, it overrides
the density value in the bar code field. When using this option,
set the density parameter in your bar code field to the default
value. You can only use this option once for each bar code field.
This option overrides the density selected in the bar code field.
Bar codes produced using Option 50 may not be scannable.
Code 39, density 12, produces a one-dot narrow bar. This density
is intended for special U.S.P.S. ACT-tag applications only.
Synthetic supplies are recommended to produce scannable bar
codes.
The additional character gap, narrow space, and wide space
parameters are valid only with Code 39 and Codabar. If these
parameters are specified for any other bar codes, they will be
ignored by the printer. Do not use Option 50 with fixed density
bar codes.
Syntax R,50,narrow,wide,gap,nar_space,
wide_space p
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 50 Option 50.
R3. narrow Dot width of the narrow element. Range: 1-99.
R4. wide Dot width of the wide element. Range: 1-99.
R5. gap Additional dot space between characters. Enter a value of 1
to 99. (Code 39 and Codabar only.)
R6. nar_space Additional dot width of the narrow bar code space. (Code 39
and Codabar only). Range: 1- 99.
R7. wide_space Additional dot width of the wide bar code space. (Code 39
and Codabar only). Range: 1- 99.
Example R,50,4,8,4,4,8 p
4-12 Defining Field Options

Creates a custom bar code density with a narrow element of 4
dots, a wide element of 8 dots, a gap of 4 dots, 4 additional dot
widths for the narrow bar code space, 8 additional dot widths for
the wide bar code space (if this is a Code 39 or Codabar bar
code).
Option 51 (PDF417 Security/Truncation)
You can define a security level and choose whether or not to
truncate a PDF417 bar code. Higher security levels add data to a
bar code, improving scan reliability. Some damaged bar codes
may still be scannable if the security level is high enough. You
can use this option to create standard PDF417 bar codes or use
the truncated option to create a narrower bar code. This option
can appear only once per PDF417 field, in any order, following the
bar code field.
As the security level is increased, so is the size of your PDF417
bar code. For each level increased, the bar code will double in
size.
Syntax R,51,security,stand/default p
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 51 Indicates Option 51.
R3. security Security level ranges from 0-8 (0 is the default).
Higher security levels add data to a bar code, improving scan
reliability. Some damaged bar codes may still be scannable if
the security level is high enough.
R4. stand/def Truncation selector. Valid values:
S (default) a standard PDF417 bar code
T truncated
Example R,51,2,S p
Defines a security level of 2 for a standard PDF417 bar code.
Defining Field Options 4-13

Option 52 (PDF417 Width/Length)
This option defines the image width or length of a PDF417 bar
code. If you define a fixed number of columns (width), the bar
code expands in length. If you define a fixed number of rows
(length), the bar code expands in width.
Column value does not include start/stop or left/right indicator
columns.
If this option does not immediately follow the PDF417 bar code
field, the default settings are used. You can only use this option
once per PDF417 bar code field.
Syntax R,52,row/column,dimension p
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 52 Indicates Option 52.
R3. row/column Indicates if you are defining the number of rows or columns.
RRow
CColumn
If you specify rows, the bar code expands in columns,
or vice versa.
R4. dimension The number of rows or columns defined for the bar code. The
default is 4. Valid values:
3-90 for rows
1-30 for columns
Example R,52,C,10 p
Defines the column width of 10, which expands the PDF417 bar
code length by 10.
4-14 Defining Field Options

Option 60 (Incrementing/Decrementing Fields)
You may have an application, such as serial numbers, in which
you need a numeric field to increment (increase in value) or
decrement (decrease in value) on successive tickets within a
single batch. Incrementing or decrementing can be applied to
numeric data only. If you have a field that includes letters and
digits, apply incrementing or decrementing to only the portion of
the field that contains digits. Do not use with Option 42 (price
field).
Syntax R,60,I/D,amount,l pos,r pos p
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 60 Option 60.
R3. I/D Iincrementing field
Ddecrementing field
R4. amount Amount to increase or decrease. Range: 0- 999.
R5. l pos Leftmost position in inc/dec portion of field. If this value is not
entered, the default value 1 is used. Range: 0 2710
(1 - 100 for 9403).
R6. r pos Rightmost position in inc/dec portion of field. If this value is
not used, the entire field length is used as the default.
Range: 0 - 2710 (1 - 100 for 9403).
Example R,60,I,5,1,6 p
Increments a field by 5 each time the field is printed. The field
increments beginning with the first left position and ending with
the sixth position.
Fixing the First Number in the Incrementing Sequence
There are two ways to enter the first number in the incrementing
sequence. You can use batch data or use Option 1 to define the
first number as a fixed character.The first number in the sequence
must contain the same amount of digits as the highest number to be
counted. For example, to count the numbers 1 to 999, the first
number in the sequence must be entered as 001.
Defining Field Options 4-15

Option 61 (Reimage Field)
This option redraws (reimages) a constant field when you have a
constant field next to a variable field on your label. It can be
used on text, constant text, bar code, line, or box fields.
These printers do not redraw an area if the field data does not
change. When a field changes, that area is cleared and the new
field data is imaged. However, the new field data may require a
larger area than the previous field did. In some cases,
neighboring fields that do not change (constant fields) may be
covered with white space from the changing field’s (variable
fields) area. Use this option to reimage the constant field, or it
may appear broken.
The most common use for this option is with
incrementing fields on your label, because
they may cover a constant field.
Syntax R,61 p
R1. R Option Header.
R2. 61 Option 61.
Example R,61 p
Reimages the constant field that appears next to a variable field.
In the above example, Option 61 was applied to the bar code field
to keep the incrementing field (Box #) from blocking out the bar
code field.
Re-Image OFF
Re-Image ON
4-16 Defining Field Options

Using Check Digits
Check digits are typically used to ensure that a text or bar code
field scans correctly. If you apply Option 31, the printer
calculates a check digit. A check digit scheme determines how
the printer calculates a check digit. When you define a check
digit scheme, you assign a number to identify it. This number is
later entered in box R4 when you apply Option 31 to a field. You
can use check digits with text or bar code fields. Check digit
calculations are performed on numeric data only.
Do not use check digits with price fields. Do not define a check
digit scheme for these bar codes, because they have predefined
check digits: UPC, EAN, Code 39 (with the MOD43 check digit),
and Code 93.
Syntax {A,selector,action,device,modulus,
fld_length,D/P,"weights" p }
A1. A Check Digit Header.
A2. selector Assign a number from 1-10 to this check digit formula.
A3. action Adds a check digit scheme. Enter A.
A4. device Device. Options:
FFlash (9403/9825)
RVolatile RAM
NOTE: Check digits stored in flash are saved when the
printer is turned off.
A5. modulus Number from 2-11. The modulus is used to divide the sum of
products or the sum of digits.
A6. fld_length The maximum number of characters the field will contain.
Range: 0 - 2710 (0 - 100 for 9403).
A7. D/P Algorithm. The algorithm determines how the check digit is
calculated.Options:
Dsum of digits
Psum of products
Defining Field Options 4-17

A8. "weights"String of digits used for calculation. A weight string is a group
of two or more numbers that is applied to a field. The number
of digits in this string should equal the number in fld_length.
Enclose in quotation marks. Range: 0 - 2710 (0 - 100 for
9403).
Example {A,1,A,R,10,5,P,"65432" p }
Adds check digit scheme number 1 to the printer’s memory. The
modulus is 10, the maximum number of characters in the field is
5. The check digit is calculated by using the Sum of Products and
the string of digits used in the calculation is "65432."
Sum of Products Calculation
This is an example of how the printer uses Sum of Products to
calculate a check digit for this data:
5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
1. Weights are applied to each digit, starting with the last digit in
the weight string. They are applied right to left, beginning at
the right-most position of the field. Remember, a weight
string must contain at least two different numbers. This
example has a weight string
of 1,2,3,4.
field: 5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
weight string: 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
2. Each digit in the field is multiplied by the weight assigned to it:
field: 5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
weight string: 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
products: 20 2 6 6 16 5 4 3 36
4-18 Defining Field Options

3. Next, the product of each digit is added together. This is the
sum of the products.
20 + 2 + 6 + 6 + 16 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 36 = 98
4. Divide the sum of the products by the modulus (10 in this
case), only to the whole number. The balance is called the
remainder.
9
10 98
90
8
5. Subtract the remainder from the modulus.
The result becomes the check digit. In this case, the check
digit is 2.
10 - 8 = 2
Sum of Digits Calculation
This is an example of how the printer uses Sum of Digits to
calculate a check digit for this data:
5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
1. Weights are applied to each digit, starting with the last digit in
the weight string. They are applied right to left, beginning at
the right-most position of the field. Remember, a weight
string must contain at least two different numbers. This
example has a weight string
of 1,2,3,4.
field: 5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
weight string: 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Defining Field Options 4-19

2. Each digit in the field is multiplied by the weight assigned to it:
field: 5 2 3 2 4 5 2 1 9
weight string: 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
products: 20 2 6 6 16 5 4 3 36
3. Next, the digits of the products are added together. Two-digit
products are treated as two separate digits.
This is the sum of the digits.
2 + 0 + 2 + 6 + 6 + 1 + 6 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 3 + 6 = 44
4. Divide the sum of the digits by the modulus (10 in this case),
only to the whole number. The balance is called the
remainder.
4
10 44
40
4
5. Subtract the remainder from the modulus.
The result becomes the check digit. In this case, the check
digit is 6.
10 - 4 = 6
4-20 Defining Field Options

CREATING GRAPHICS 5
This chapter provides information on how to
Nmap out the graphic image using the hexadecimal (hex) or
run length method.
Ncreate a graphic packet using a graphic header, bitmap,
duplicate, next-bitmap, text, constant text, line, and box
Fields.
Nplace a graphic image into a format.
You can use graphic packets to create compliance labels or
bitmapped images. To include a graphic packet within your format,
your format must contain a graphic field. See "Placing the
Graphic in a Format," for more information.
Creating Graphics 5-1

Overview of Compliance Labels
You can create compliance labels by using a graphic packet for
the fixed fields and a format packet for the variable fields of your
compliance label. The fixed fields of a compliance label are
composed of text, lines, or boxes, which are repeated on each
label. The variable fields are composed of text, bar codes, and
order information, which changes with each label. Using a
graphic packet for the fixed fields saves time, because the printer
does not have to image all the lines or boxes each time the
compliance label is printed.
Also, using a graphic packet for a compliance label reduces the
number of fields in your format. Formats have a maximum
number of fields per packet (0-999 or 0-99 for 9403). However,
you can bypass that requirement by placing your compliance
layout in a graphic packet. When you process your formats, you
only need one line in the format packet to reference the graphic
packet.
The following example shows how to reference a graphic packet
from within a format packet.
{start of header
F,1,A,R,E,400,400,"RDCI" p format header
G,57,0,0,0,0 p reference to graphic packet
C,40,10,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"To:",0pconstant text field
B,2,13,V,310,30,8,4,50,8,L,0 p bar code field
}end of header
Once you have your compliance label format set, all you need to
do is add the variable sections (bar codes, addresses, and order
information) to the format packet.
To see a sample compliance label graphic packet, see "Sample
Compliance Graphic Packet." To see a sample compliance label
using a graphic packet within a format, see "Sample Compliance
Label."
5-2 Creating Graphics

Overview of Bitmapped Images
A printed image is formed through a series of dots. Each square
on the grid below represents a dot on the printhead. The graphic
image is created by blackening dots in a specific pattern. You
can print varying shades of gray according to the concentration of
dots on the image. When the dots are printed together, the end
result is a graphic image.
Determining a Method
You can use one of two methods to map out your graphic image:
Hex Method The dot sequences are segmented into binary
numbers, and then converted to hex numbers.
A graphic using gray-scaling, several slanted
lines, or several vertical lines typically
translates more efficiently with hex
representation.
Run Length
Encoding Method
The dot sequences are segmented into black
and white strings within a row. The total
count of each white string is converted to a
lower-case letter, corresponding to numeric
value. The total count of each black string is
converted to an uppercase letter,
corresponding to numeric value. This method
can reduce imaging time for graphics that
contain repetitive rows of dots. A graphic
with horizontal lines or very few
white-to-black borders typically translates
more efficiently with run length encoding.
Creating Graphics 5-3

The most efficient encoding method depends on how complicated
your graphic image is and whether or not imaging time is a
concern. You may want to experiment with both encoding
methods to get optimal performance.
Designing Compliance Labels
To use a graphic packet to design your compliance label:
1. Decide which fields are fixed (constant text, lines, boxes) and
which fields are variable (addresses and shipping
information).
2. Design your compliance label as you would any other format.
Designing Bitmapped Images
Once you determine the encoding method to use, you can begin
mapping out your graphic image.
The image that you map must be an upside
down mirror image of the final result.
Special Considerations
Solid black print cannot exceed 30% of any given square inch of
the supply. If the black print exceeds this limit, you may lose data
or damage the printhead.
5-4 Creating Graphics

In the first label, the large "M" logo and thick black line exceed
the allowed black to white print ratio. In the second label, the
large "M" logo does not exceed the black to white print ratio.
Using the Hex Method
The following steps explain how to derive a hex character string
from a bitmapped graphic.
Each square on the grid represents a dot. A black square
indicates the dot is ON, and a white square indicates the dot is
OFF. A sequence of binary numbers, called a bit pattern or
bitmap, determines what dots are on and off. The numbers "0"
and "1" are used for this purpose. The number "1" turns a dot on
and "0" turns a dot off.
Exceeds
Limit
Exceeds
Limit
0.5"
2 inches
Does not
exceed
limit
0.5"
Does not
exceed
limit
2 inches
Creating Graphics 5-5

1. Assign 1 to every black square and 0 to every white square.
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000111111111111111111111111110000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111000000000000000000000000001111111110000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111100000000000000000000000000000000000000000000001111110000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000011110000000000000000111111111111111111111111110000000000000001111000000000
00000000000000000000000001111100001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111110000
00000000000000000000000110000011111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111000001100
00000000000000000000000110001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110
00000000000000000000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110
00000000000000000000000111111111111111111111111111111000000000000000000011111111111111111111111111111110
00000000000000000000000111111111111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111111111100
00000000000000000000000001111111100000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000011111111110000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000000000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000010000000000000000000011111110000000000000000000111111111111111111100000000000000000001111111000000
00000011000000000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000000111000000
00000001111000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000111000000
00000000111000000000000000000011111111111111000000000000000000000000000000000000011111111111111000000000
00000000111111000000000000011100000000111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111100000001111000000
00000000111111100000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110001111000000
2. Section off the grid in columns of eight. If any rows are not
divisible by 8, add enough 0’s to complete a column.
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11000000 00000000 00000000 00001111 11111000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111110 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000111 11100000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00011110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 01111100 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11110000
00000000 00000000 00000001 10000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00001100
00000000 00000000 00000001 10001111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110
00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110
00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110
00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111111 11111100
00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 10000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00111111 11110000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000010 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000011 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000001 11100000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 11100000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 11111100 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000011 11000000
00000000 11111110 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100011 11000000
5-6 Creating Graphics

3. One row at a time, convert each group of eight binary digits to
hex values, using the binary to hex conversion chart found in
Appendix C.
starting at position 49 ...
00111111 = 3F
11111111 = FF
11111111 = FF
11110000 = F0
4. Write the hex values for each row as a continuous string.
row 1, position 49 = 03FFFFFF00000
All hex numbers must be two digits. For
example, write hex 0 as 00, or hex E as 0E.
5. Repeat steps 3 through 4 for each row on the grid.
6. Insert the hex values in syntax format.
Using the Run Length Encoding Method
The following steps explain how to derive a run length character
string from a bitmapped graphic.
Each square on the grid represents a dot. A black square
indicates the dot is ON, and a white square indicates the dot is
OFF.
For visual clarity, the following example
shows "1" to indicate when a square is ON,
and "0" to indicate when a square is OFF.
You do not have to convert your dots when
using the run length method.
Creating Graphics 5-7

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11000000 00000000 00000000 00001111 11111000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111110 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00001111 11000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00011110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 01111100 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11110000
00000000 00000000 00000001 10000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00001100
00000000 00000000 00000001 10001111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110
00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110
00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110
00000000 00000000 00000001 11111111 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111111 11111100
00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 10000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00111111 11110000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000010 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000 00000000 00000111 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 00011111 11000000
00000011 00000000 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000001 11000000
00000001 11100000 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100001 11000000
00000000 11100000 00000000 00000011 11111111 11110000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01111111 11111110 00000000
00000000 11111100 00000000 00011100 00000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 00000011 11000000
00000000 11111110 00000000 00000000 00111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100011 11000000
1. Count the number of consecutive OFF or ON dots in a row.
Write the number of consecutive dots in sequence for the first
row on the grid. Write "ON" or "OFF" after each number to
indicate ON or OFF dots.
(row 1, position 50) 26 on
(row 2, position 39) 11 on, 26 off, 9 on
(row 3, position 34) 5 on, 45 off, 6 on.
2. Replace each number you have written with its corresponding
code from the Dot to Run Length Encoding Chart provided in
Appendix C, "Symbol Sets/Code Pages." Be sure to use
CAPITAL letters for black dots and lower-case letters for white
dots.
26 on (Z)
11 on (K), 26 off (z), 9 on (I)
.
.
If the number is greater than 26, write z, followed by the letter
corresponding to the amount over 26. For example, to represent
45 off dots, write zs.
5 on (E), 45 off (zs), 6 on (F)
.
.
3. Write the letter codes in sequence, uninterrupted, for each
row.
5-8 Creating Graphics

(row 1,position 50) Z
(row 2,position 39) KzI
(row 3,position 34) EzsF
(row 4,position 30) DpZoD
.
.
If the end of the line specifies OFF dots
(lower-case letters), the ending lower-case
letters can be omitted. For example, uZFu
can be written as uZF.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each row on the grid.
5. Insert the code values in syntax format.
Determining How to Store the Image
Once you have mapped out your graphic image, determine how
you want to store it. You have several options:
NFlash
NNon-volatile RAM
NVolatile RAM
NTemporary Storage
Using Flash
Flash memory is only available on the 9403 and 9825 printers.
You can use flash memory when the graphic image is used by
several formats, because you only have to send the graphic
image once. This eliminates the need to send the graphic image
repeatedly. See "Placing the Graphic in a Format," for more
information about using the graphic packet in a format.
Graphics stored in flash memory are saved
when the printer is turned off. Refer to the
Operator’s Handbook to clear flash memory.
Creating Graphics 5-9

Using Non-volatile RAM
You can save graphics to non-volatile RAM on the 9850 printer.
Graphics are saved when you turn off the printer. You can
remove graphics from memory if necessary by sending a clear
packet. See "Clearing Packets from Memory" in Chapter 2 for
more information.
Using Volatile RAM
You should use RAM when the graphic image is used by several
formats, because you only have to send the graphic image once.
This eliminates the need to send the graphic image repeatedly.
See "Placing the Graphic in a Format," for more information about
using the graphic packet in a format. Graphics smaller than
approximately 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch can be stored in printer RAM
and referenced by the graphic ID number.
Graphics are stored in the format buffer and
remain there until another graphic packet is
sent or the printer is turned off.
Using Temporary Storage
You should use temporary storage when the graphic image is
used only in one format or your graphic image is very large.
Graphic data in temporary storage is held in the image buffer until
the graphic is printed and then it is cleared from memory.
Temporary graphics are also cleared from memory when you send
a new batch or update batch. You can use the same graphic
image multiple times on a format. Send the graphic image to the
printer after the format to which it applies.
If a graphic is stored in temporary storage, do not place a graphic
field in the format. This will cause an error. Instead, position the
graphic image by using the row and column locations in the
graphic packet header. Image memory (temporary storage) will
accept a graphic packet 1218 rows long with 811 dots per row.
5-10 Creating Graphics

Creating a Graphic Packet
Your graphic packet can contain:
Nbitmapped fields (for bitmapped images)
Nconstant text fields
Nlines
Nboxes
Images using hex representation or run length encoding are
bitmapped images. See "Designing Bitmapped Images," to
design your bitmapped image.
Once you design your graphic image, you are ready to define a
graphic packet. This packet generates the graphic image you use
in a format.
Positioning the Graphic Image
This section explains how to position the graphic image within a
graphic packet header, a field of a graphic packet, or within a
format.
Within the Graphic Packet Header
When you are using RAM, the row and column parameters in the
graphic header are usually 0,0, because placement is controlled
by the graphic field in your format. This is especially true when
designing a compliance label overlay.
When you are using temporary storage, these parameters control
the placement of the graphic image on the supply.
Creating Graphics 5-11

The area enclosed within the dotted lines
represents the graphic image starting at
0,0 (as defined in the graphic header).
If you want a fixed amount of white space
around your graphic image, use
something other than 0 for row and/ or
column.
The area enclosed within the dotted lines
represents the graphic image starting at
0,0 with a fixed amount of white space
(10,10) around the graphic image.
Within the Field
The row and column parameters in a
bitmap, constant text, line, or box field
control where an individual field or
bitmapped row begins in relation to the
coordinates defined in the graphic header.
The bottom of the triangle in this example
represents the first field of the graphic
packet starting at 10,0.
5-12 Creating Graphics

Within a Format
When you define the graphic field within your format, the row and
column parameters represent where on the format to place the
graphic image.
If you are doing a compliance label, these numbers are usually
0,0, because your compliance label covers the entire supply. See
"Placing the Graphic in a Format," for a sample compliance label.
If you are placing a graphic (a
logo, for example) within a
certain area on your supply,
enter the starting position
(bottom left corner) of the
graphic image.
This label shows the triangle
"logo" beginning (the bottom left
corner) at 400,75 as defined in
the graphic field.
Defining the Graphic Header
Every graphic packet must contain a graphic header. This is the
first thing you enter. It identifies and provides important
measurement and formatting information for the graphic. Bitmap,
duplicate, next-bitmap, constant text, line, and box fields follow
the graphic header, if they are used.
Syntax {G,graphID,action,device,units,row,col,
mode,"name" p
G1. G Graphic Header.
G2. graphID Unique number from 0 to 999 (0 to 99 for 9403) to identify the
graphic image.
Creating Graphics 5-13

G3. action Enter A to add the graphic to the printer.
G4. device Graphic storage device. Options:
FFlash (9403/9825)
NNon-volatile RAM
RVolatile RAM
TTemporary storage
NOTE: Graphics stored in flash are saved when the printer is
turned off.
G5. units Unit of measure. For bitmapped graphics, G (dots) is the only
valid option.
G6. row Distance between the bottom of the graphic image area and
the first bitmap line. This is usually 0, unless you want a fixed
amount of white space around the graphic image. See
"Positioning the Graphic Image," for more information.
Printer Unit of Measure Row or
End Row
Column or
End Column
9403
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-599
0-1523
0-1217
0-199
0-507
0-405
9825/
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4063
0-3247
0-399
0-1015
0-811
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3047
0-3599
0-399
0-1015
0-1199
G7. column Distance between the left edge of the graphic image area and
the left edge of first bitmap line. This is usually 0, unless you
want a fixed amount of white space around the graphic image.
See "Positioning the Graphic Image," for more information.
Use the previous table for values.
G8. mode Imaging mode. Enter 0.
G9. "name" Graphic name (optional), 0-8 characters, enclose within
quotation marks.
Example {G,99,A,R,G,0,0,0,"99Wire" p
Adds a graphic image identified by number 99 to volatile RAM.
The graphic uses dot measurement. The image will be placed
according to the row and column parameters in the graphic field.
The imaging mode is 0 and the image is called 99Wire.
5-14 Creating Graphics

Creating Bitmap Fields
This defines one row of dots, starting at a specific row and
column within the graphic image. Each unique row of dots
requires a bitmap field. A bitmap field can later be repeated by
using a duplicate field.
Syntax B,row,column,algorithm,"data" p
B1. B Bitmap Field.
B2. row Distance (in dots) from the graphic image’s bottom margin to
the bitmap line.
Printer Unit of Measure Row or
End Row
Column or
End Column
9403
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-599
0-1523
0-1217
0-199
0-507
0-405
9825/
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4063
0-3247
0-399
0-1015
0-811
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3047
0-3599
0-399
0-1015
0-1199
B3. column Distance (in dots) from the graphic image’s left edge to the
bitmap line. Use the previous table for values.
B4. algorithm Coding method for bitmap data:
HHex Representation
RRun Length Encoding
B5. data Character string made up of hex or run length encoding. Do
not put spaces or any other character between the numbers.
Range: 0 - 2710 (0 - 100 for 9403).
Example {B,39,56,H,"3FFFFFF0" p
Defines a bitmapped graphic field. The image begins 39 dots
from the bottom and 56 dots from the left edge of the graphic
area. Hex representation is used.
Creating Graphics 5-15

Creating Next-Bitmap Fields
This field uses the previous field’s row and column locations. It
allows you to use the bitmap or duplicate field data without having
to recalculate row and column locations. This field represents
one row of dots on the image.
Syntax N,adjdir,adjamt,algorithm,"data" p
N1. N Next-Bitmap Field.
N2. adjdir Increments or decrements the row count. Inserts the
duplicate line after or before the current row.
0Increments (inserts after)
1Decrements (inserts before)
For example:
B,50,35,R,"GsSsG" p
N,0,R,"DpZoD" p
prints a next-bitmap field on row 51 at column 35.
N3. adjamt Amount of row adjustment in dot rows. Using 0 overwrites the
same line. Range: 0 - 999 (0 - 99 for 9403).
N4. algorithm Coding method for bitmap data:
HHex Representation
RRun Length Encoding
N5. "data" Character string made up of hex or run length encoding. Do
not put spaces or any other character between the hex
numbers or run length code letters. Range: 0 - 2710 (0 - 100
for 9403).
Example B,39,56,H,"3FFFFFF0" p
N,0,1,H,"000000E00000" p
Defines a next-bitmap graphic field beginning on row 40. The row
count increments by 1. Hex representation is used.
5-16 Creating Graphics

Creating Duplicate Fields
If a line of data is identical to a previous bitmap or next-bitmap
field, the duplicate field allows you to repeat the dot sequence
without retyping the data. A duplicate field represents one row of
dots on the image. Duplicate fields are useful when you have a
graphic with a lot of repetition.
Syntax D,adjdir,adjamt,count p
D1. D Duplicate Field.
D2. adjdir Increments or decrements the row count. Inserts the
duplicate line after or before the current row.
0Increments (inserts after)
1Decrements (inserts before)
For example:
B,50,35,R,"GsSsG" p
D,0,20,2 p
inserts row 50 again at row 70 and row 90. Rows
70 and 90 do not have to be defined later.
D3. adjamt Amount of row adjustment in dot rows. Range: 0 - 999
(0 - 99 for 9403). The above example adjusts the duplicate
field to image on row 70 and 90 (adding 20 to the current row
count).
D4. count Number of times to duplicate the line. Range: 0 - 999
(0 - 99 for 9403).
Example B,117,24,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" p
D,0,1,2 p
Defines a duplicate field that is imaged after the bitmap line. This
field duplicates the preceding bitmap line twice (at row 118 and
119).
You can use constant text, line, or box fields in a graphic packet
to create a compliance label overlay. See Chapter 3, "Defining
Fields," for more information about these fields.
Creating Graphics 5-17

Sample Compliance Graphic Packet
A sample compliance graphic packet is shown below.
{G,57,A,R,E,0,0,0,"OVERLAY" p
L,V,500,155,90,85,3 p
L,V,298,245,90,102,3 p
L,V,500,2,0,390,3 p
L,V,400,2,0,390,3 p
L,V,298,2,0,390,3 p
L,V,200,2,0,390,5 p
C,560,10,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"FROM:",0 p
C,560,160,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"CARRIER:",0 p
C,529,160,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"PRO NUMBER:",0 p
C,511,160,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"B/L NUMBER:",0 p
C,472,10,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"TO:",0 p
C,387,10,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"SHIP TO POSTAL CODE",0 p
C,391,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"APPOINTMENT NUMBER:",0 p
C,358,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ORDER TYPE:",0 p
C,327,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ITEM:",0 p
C,190,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"UPC SHIPPING CONTAINER CODE",0 p
C,548,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MONARCH MARKING SYSTEMS",0 p
C,538,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"170 MONARCH LANE",0 p
C,528,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"P.O. BOX 608",0 p
C,518,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"DAYTON, OHIO 45401",0 p
C,462,313,0,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,"#",0 p }
The sample compliance label
overlay was created with this
packet, using the format provided
in "Placing the Graphic in a
Format."
5-18 Creating Graphics

Sample Hex Graphic Packet
{G,99,A,R,G,0,0,0,"99WIRE"
B,39,48,H,"3FFFFFF0" p
B,40,32,H,"01FFC000000FF8" p
B,41,32,H,"3E00000000000FC0" p
B,42,24,H,"03C0003FFFFFF0000F" p
B,43,24,H,"7C3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1F0" p
B,44,16,H,"0183FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF06" p
B,45,16,H,"018FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE" p
B,46,16,H,"01FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE" p
B,47,16,H,"01FFFFFF80001FFFFFFFFE" p
B,48,16,H,"01FFFFF0000000007FFFFC" p
B,49,24,H,"7F800007FFFF00003FF0" p
B,50,24,H,"1FC00007FFFF00001FC0" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,51,24,H,"1C03FFFFFFFFFFFE01C0" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,52,32,H,"3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1C0" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,53,24,H,"03FFF0000000007FFE" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,70,0,H,"0400001FC00007FFFF00001FC0" p
B,71,0,H,"0600001C03FFFFFFFFFFFE01C0" p
B,72,0,H,"030000003FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1C0" p
B,73,0,H,"01000003FFF0000000007FFE" p
B,74,8,H,"FC001C03FFFFFFFFFFFE00C0" p
B,75,8,H,"FE00003FFFFFFFFFFFFFE0C0" p
B,76,8,H,"1FF803FFF0000000007FFE" p
B,77,8,H,"0FFFCFFC00000000000001C0" p
B,78,16,H,"FFDF000FFFFFFFFF8003C0" p
B,79,16,H,"7FFFC00007FFFF00001FC0" p
B,80,24,H,"1C03FFFFFFFFFFFE01C0" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,81,32,H,"3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE1C0" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,82,24,H,"03FFF0000000007FFE" p
D,0,4,3 p
B,83,24,H,"1FC00007FFFF00001FC0" p
D,0,4,3 p
B,98,24,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0" p
B,99,24,H,"07FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" p
B,100,24,H,"1FF9FFFFFFFFFFFFFF" p
B,101,24,H,"3FFE0007FFFF8000FF80" p
B,102,24,H,"391E0027FFFF803FFFC0" p
B,103,24,H,"1C7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0" p
B,104,24,H,"1FC1FFFFFFFFFFFF1FC0" p
Creating Graphics 5-19

B,105,24,H,"0FFDFFFFFFFFFFE0FF" p
B,106,24,H,"FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8" p
B,107,32,H,"3FFFFFFFFFFFFFE0" p
B,108,32,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFF" p
B,109,48,H,"07FFFF80" p
D,0,1,2 p
B,111,48,H,"FFFFFFFF" p
B,112,32,H,"FFFF00000000FFE0" p
B,113,24,H,"078000FFFFFFFF001F" p
B,114,24,H,"78FFFFFFFFFFFFFFE060" p
B,115,16,H,"0187FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC18" p
B,116,16,H,"027FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2" p
B,117,16,H,"03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" p
D,0,1,2 p
B,120,16,H,"01FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8" p
B,121,24,H,"FEFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE0" p
B,122,24,H,"07FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC" p
B,123,32,H,"FFFFFFFFFFFFFFC0" p
B,124,32,H,"01FFFFFFFFFFF8" p }
Sample Run Length Graphic Packet
{G,99,A,R,G,0,0,0,"99WIRE" p
B,39,50,R,"Z" p
B,40,39,R,"KzI" p
B,41,34,R,"EzsF" p
B,42,30,R,"DpZoD" p
B,43,25,R,"EdZZEdE" p
B,44,23,R,"BeZZMeB" p
B,45,23,R,"BcZZW" p
B,46,23,R,"ZZZA" p
B,47,23,R,"ZDsZE" p
B,48,24,"TzkU" p
B,49,25,"HtRqJ" p
B,50,27,"GsSsG" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,51,27,"ChZWgC" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,52,34,R,"ZZEdC" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,53,30,R,"NzkN" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,70,5,R,"AuGsSsG" p
B,71,5,R,"BtChZWgC" p
B,72,6,R,"DxZZEdC" p
B,73,7,R,"CtNzkN" p
5-20 Creating Graphics

B,74,8,R,"FmChZWhC" p
B,75,8,R,"GsZZEdC" p
B,76,11,R,"JiNzkN" p
B,77,12,R,"NbJzzeC" p
B,78,16,R,"JaElZKmD" p
B,79,17,R,"QsSsG" p
B,80,27,R,"ChZWgC" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,81,34,R,"ZZEdC" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,82,30,R,"NzkN" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,83,27,R,"GsSsG" p
D,0,4,4 p
B,98,30,R,"ZZJ" p
B,99,29,R,"ZZM" p
B,100,27,R,"JbZZE" p
B,101,26,R,"MnToI" p
B,102,26,R,"CbHnTiP" p
B,103,27,R,"CcZZC" p
B,104,27,R,"GeZWcG" p
B,105,28,R,"JaZReH" p
B,106,32,R,"ZZI" p
B,107,34,R,"ZZE" p
B,108,38,R,"ZQ" p
B,109,53,R,"T" p
D,0,1,2 p
B,111,48,R,"ZF" p
B,112,33,R,"PzfK" p
B,113,29,R,"CpZBoE" p
B,114,25,R,"DcZZGfB" p
B,115,23,R,"BdZZMeB" p
B,116,22,R,"AbZZVbA" p
B,117,22,R,"ZZZB" p
D,0,1,2 p
B,120,23,R,"ZZZ" p
B,121,25,R,"ZZV" p
B,122,29,R,"ZZM" p
B,123,32,R,"ZZF" p
B,124,39,R,"ZT" p }
Creating Graphics 5-21

Placing the Graphic in a Format
The graphic image may be a bitmapped graphic or a compliance
label overlay.
To include a graphic within a format:
1. Design the graphic image as shown in "Designing Bitmapped
Images."
2. If you are using RAM, place a graphic field in the format file to
reference the graphic. See the following section, "Defining
the Graphic Field," for more information.
If you are using temporary storage, you do
not need a graphic field in your format to
reference the graphic image.
3. Download all the necessary packets (check digit, format, etc.).
4. Send the graphic file to the printer, if you have not already
done so. See "Creating a Graphic Packet," for more
information.
Defining the Graphic Field
The graphic field in a format references the graphic image by the
graphID in the graphic header.
This field is required only if the graphic
will be stored in RAM.
Syntax G,graphID,row,col,mode,rotation p
G1. G Graphic Field.
G2. graphID Unique number from 0 to 999 (0 to 99 for 9403) to identify the
graphic image.
5-22 Creating Graphics

G3. row Distance between the bottom of the print area on the supply to
the bottom of the graphic image. Measured in selected units.
Printer Unit of Measure Row or
End Row
Column or
End Column
9403
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-599
0-1523
0-1217
0-199
0-507
0-405
9825/
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
203 dpi Dots
0-1599
0-4063
0-3247
0-399
0-1015
0-811
9850
English (1/100 inch)
Metric (1/10 mm)
300 dpi Dots
0-1199
0-3047
0-3599
0-399
0-1015
0-1199
The row specified in the constant text, bitmap, line, or box
field is added to the row value above to determine the actual
position in the format.
G4. column Distance between the left edge of the print area on the supply
and the left edge of the graphic. Measured in selected units.
Use the previous table for values. The column specified in
the constant text, bitmap, line, or box field is added to the col
value above to determine the actual position in the format.
G5. mode Imaging mode. Enter 0.
G6. rotation The orientation of the graphic on the supply. Enter 0.
Example G,57,0,0,0,0 p
Defines a graphic field that is identified by the number 57. The
image begins at 0,0. The imaging mode is 0 and there is no
rotation.
Sample Compliance Label
This sample format packet uses the graphic packet in "Creating a
Graphic Packet."
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"RDCI" p
G,57,0,0,0,0 p
T,1,15,V,529,252,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,2,15,V,511,252,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
B,3,13,V,311,28,8,4,50,8,L,0 p
B,4,14,V,17,60,50,5,110,8,L,0 p
T,5,30,V,161,080,0,3,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p
Creating Graphics 5-23

T,6,15,V,467,40,4,1,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,7,10,V,462,330,6,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,8,20,V,545,160,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,9,30,V,446,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,10,30,V,426,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,11,30,V,406,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,12,20,V,368,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,13,5,V,335,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,14,15,V,304,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,15,15,V,366,65,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
R,1,"(420) " p }
Sample Batch Packet
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"123456789" p
2,"987654321" p
3,"42032678" p
4,"10028028662854" p
5,"1 00 28028 66285 4" p
6,"RODGER DIST CTR" p
7,"8292" p
8,"BROADWAY" p
9,"555 WEST OAK AVE." p
10,"DAYTON, OH 45401-0608" p
11," " p
12,"999991-001" p
13,"AR" p
14,"999-999999-99" p
15,"32678" p }
5-24 Creating Graphics

Sample Bitmap Graphic Image
The following format shows the graphic packets (hex and run
length) in a sample format.
{F,2,A,R,E,400,400,"FMT2" p
G,99,227,35,0,0 p
Q,240,15,300,125,10," " p
T,1,5,V,285,137,0,10,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,2,5,V,255,137,0,10,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,3,15,V,180,25,0,10,1,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,4,15,V,121,35,0,1,3,1,B,L,0,0,0 p
L,S,94,15,94,235,10," " p
B,5,12,F,50,65,1,2,40,1,L,0 p }
Sample Batch Packet
{B,2,N,1 p
1,"Pat’s" p
2,"Parts" p
3,"3/8 inch Wire" p
4,"3.55/8 Pack" p
5,"345911871209" p }
Creating Graphics 5-25

5-26 Creating Graphics

PRINTING 6
This chapter describes how to
Ndownload files to the printer
Ndefine the batch header, batch control, and batch data files
Nmodify formats
Ncreate DOS batch files.
This chapter also lists some special printing considerations.
Printing 6-1

Turn on the printer and make sure it is ready to receive data
before you download. See your host’s documentation, system
administrator, or "Downloading Methods" for information on ways
to download.
When downloading, send your packets in this order:
1. Memory configuration packet (M)
2. Configuration packets (A-G)
3. Any of the following:
✦Check digit packets (see Chapter 4)
✦Format packets (see Chapter 3)
✦Graphic packets (see Chapter 5)
4. Batch data (see "Defining the Batch Header")
To download from a PC:
1. Check that the PC and the printer are connected.
2. Check that communications have been established between
the PC and the printer.
3. Send the communication settings packet to select the
printer’s communication settings. See "Defining the
Communication Settings Packet" in Chapter 2 for more
information (only used for serial communication). If you
change the printer’s communication settings, make sure they
match those at the host before sending any packets to the
printer.
4. Type this command at the DOS prompt:
COPY LABEL1.FMT COM1 Transmits a file called "LABEL1.FMT" to COM1.
COPY LABEL1.BCH COM1 Transmits a batch called "LABEL1.BCH" to COM1.
6-2 Printing

If you use the COPY command to download your formats, set flow
control to DTR (not XON/XOFF). Also, do not use the MS-DOS
prompt from inside Windows, because you will get a framing error.
Refer to the Operator’s Handbook or Keypad Operating
Instructions for offline data entry and more printing information.
Defining the Batch Header
Batch data is the actual information printed on the supply. Batch
data fills in the format’s text, bar code, and non-printable text
fields.
A batch packet contains three parts:
batch header identifies the format and how many labels to
print.
batch control defines the print job.
batch data
(optional)
defines the actual information printed on the
label.
A batch header begins the file. It tells which format the batch
uses and how many labels to print. To record batch data, make a
copy of the worksheet in Appendix D, "Format Design Tools."
Syntax {B,format#,N/U,quantity p
B1. B Batch Header.
B2. format# Format number: 0-999 (0-99 for 9403) to use.
B3. N/U Controls how image is generated.
NNew. Erase image and re-image all fields using
online data. Any missing fields will be blank.
UUpdate last image with 1 or more fields.
All other fields remain the same as the last
queued batch.
Printing 6-3

B4. quantity Quantity to print (0-32000).
NOTE: Using 0 pre-images the field to reduce the imaging
time for labels. See "Batch Quantity Zero Method"
for more information.
Example {B,1,N,1 p
Defines a batch header that uses format #1 and reimages all
fields using the online data. One label is printed with this batch.
Defining the Batch Control Field
The batch header must precede this field. The batch control field
defines the print job and applies only to the batch that
immediately follows.
Syntax E,feed_mode,batch_sep,print_mult,
multi_part,cut_type,cut_mult p
E1. E Batch Control Field.
E2. feed_mode Feed Mode. Options:
0Continuous Feed (default)
1On-demand
E3. batch_sep Batch Separator (striped label in between batches). Options:
0Does not print a separator (default)
1Prints a separator
2Double-length separator- prints 2 tags (9850)
NOTE: Do not use batch separators with continuous
(non-indexed) supply. If using a stacker, the batch
separator is always 3.66 inches long.
E4. print_mult Number of tags with the same image. 0 is the default.
1 to 999
E5. multi_part Number of identical parts on one tag. 0 is the default.
1 to 5
6-4 Printing

E6. cut_type Enables or disables the knife. Options:
0Does not cut (default)
1Cuts before first tag, cuts each tag, and cuts after
last tag. (9850)
2Cuts before first tag, cuts after batch. Cuts in strips,
not each tag. (9850)
3Cuts before first tag, cuts each tag, cuts after the last
tag and feeds one or two tags past the printhead when
it cuts the last tag in the last batch. (9850)
4Does not cut before the first tag in a batch, but cuts
between each tag and after the last tag in the batch.
Press Feed to feed the last tag out far enough to be
cut. The last tag is queued to be cut once it reaches
the knife. (9850)
NOTE: If you choose cut after batch or last tag in last batch,
the last tag in the batch is cut. However, there may
be one or two tags left between the printhead and the
knife, because the knife is two-and-a-half inches
away from the printhead.
E7. cut_mult Number of tags to print before cutting. A cut multiple of one
cuts after each tag. The range is 0 to 32,000. 0 is the default.
The cut multiple is a multiple of the print quantity. If the cut
multiple is three and the print quantity is 16, then five sets of
three tags and one set of one tag is produced.
NOTE: The last tag in the batch is always cut, regardless of
the multiple.
Only the 9850 printer supports an optional knife,
which must be purchased separately.
Example E,0,1,4,2,1,4 p
Defines a batch control field. Continuous feed mode is used
and a separator prints between batches. Four tags have the
same image and there are two identical parts on one tag. The
knife cuts after every four tags.
Printing 6-5

Defining Batch Data Fields
Batch data fields should be sent in field number order. Use
continuation fields for large amounts of data. If you are using N
(New) in the batch header, you must list all fields with your data in
sequence. If you are using U, you need to list only those fields
and data that changes from the last printed batch.
Syntax field#,"data string" p
C,"continuation" p
field# Identifies the text, bar code, or non-printable text field in
which to insert the following data. Range: 0 - 999
(0 - 99 for 9403).
"data string" Provides the actual information to appear in fields. Enclose in
quotation marks. Range: 0 - 2710 (0 - 100 for 9403).
CIdentifies information to be appended to the data string. (This
parameter is optional.)
"continuation" Provides the actual information to be added to the batch
packet. Enclose in quotation marks. Use this option to break
up longer fields. (This parameter is optional.)
Example 1,"Size 12" p
2,"" p
3,"Blue" p
C,"and this would be appended." p
Defines a batch data field. "Size 12" prints in field #1, a blank
line appears in field #2, "Blue and this would be appended" prints
in field #3.
Using Special Characters in Batch Data
There are two ways to specify special characters in batch data:
NPlace a tilde (~) before the character
NUse a tilde with the decimal ASCII equivalent
6-6 Printing

For example, you can use "" or ~034 to print the " character in
your batch data. Use ~~ to print the ~ character in your batch
data; otherwise, the tilde characters is ignored. You can also use
~XXX where XXX is the decimal equivalent or an unprintable
character.
Sample Batch Data with Special Characters
{B,1,N,1
p Decimal Character What Prints
1,"123~034456789"
p ~034 is " 123"456789
2,"~094983~‘126LG4451"
p ~094 is ^
~126 is ~
^983~‘LG4451
Merged or Sub-Fields
If a field is completely filled by data copied from other fields, use
quotation marks without spaces between them for the "data
string" parameter.
Incrementing Fields
In incrementing fields, the first number in the sequence must
contain the same number of digits as the highest number to be
counted. For example, to increment the numbers in a field from 1
to 999, enter the starting number in the batch as 001.
9850 Special Printing Considerations
Keep in mind the following special printing considerations when
using a 9850 printer.
Printing 6-7

Print
Speed
Printing Printhead
Density
Knife Peel Mode
2.5/4.0/6.0 ips direct
transfer 203/300 dpi supported supported
8.0 ips direct
transfer 203/300 dpi not supported supported
10.0 ips direct
transfer 203 dpi only not supported not supported
12.0 ips direct
transfer 203 dpi only not supported not supported
* The 9850 minimum label feed length is 0.75 inches using 8, 10, or 12 ips printing. 94x5
emulation is not supported using 300 dpi. The maximum supply and image length with
the optional 300 dpi printhead is 12.0 inches (305 mm). The recommended print speed
using the optional verifier is 6.0 ips. Contact your Monarch Representative for supply
requirements in high temperature and high humidity environments.
9850 Serial Bar Code Printing Information
Keep in mind the following serial bar code printing information
when using a 9850 printer.
Print
Speed
Printhead
Density
Minimum Bar Code Narrow
Element
2.5 ips 203/300 dpi less than 3 dots
4.0 ips 203 dpi 3 dots
6.0/8.0/10.0 ips 203 dpi 4 dots or more
Downloading Methods
Depending on your application, you can download the format and
batch data using one of three methods: sequential method, batch
method, batch quantity zero method.
Sequential Method
Using the sequential method, you send all your format and batch
data at one time. Use this method when your application does
not require operator intervention to input data. All data is sent
down at one time, and the printer then images each field. As
soon as the last field is imaged, your labels begin to print.
6-8 Printing

Example {Format}
{Batch Packet}
Batch Method
This is similar to the sequential method, but it is used when you
want to send multiple batches. All data for the first batch is
sent at one time, and the printer then images each field. As soon
as the last field for the first batch is imaged, labels begin to print.
This process is repeated for each subsequent batch.
Example {Format}
{Batch Packet}
{Batch Packet}
Batch Quantity Zero Method
You may use the batch quantity zero method when your
application requires operator intervention to enter data. While the
operator is entering data, the previous field is sent with a batch
quantity of zero. The printer images the field, but does not print
it. After the operator enters the data for the last field, the batch
quantity can be specified. The last remaining field is imaged, and
the label prints almost immediately. To use the batch quantity
zero method:
1. Send the format and a batch header in one file. The first time
you send the batch header, use the parameter N (new batch),
and the parameter 0 for (zero quantity). This ensures the
label is properly positioned.
The printer images constant text, line, and box fields, but
does not print them.
2. Input data for each field, and send it with a batch header
using the parameter U (batch update) and a quantity of zero.
When the printer receives the data, it immediately images the
field, but does not print it.
At this time, the printer is imaging all associated fields,
including fields that copy from other fields.
Printing 6-9

3. Repeat step 2 for each field except the last one.
4. For the last field, input data and send a batch header with the
quantity of labels you want printed. When the printer receives
input for the last field, it immediately prints the labels. See
"Reducing Imaging Time" in Chapter 9 for an example using
the batch quantity zero method.
Modifying Formats
The optional entry method is a quick way to modify your format
fields, check digit fields, and configuration packets.
Optional Entry Method
This method enables you to reset only the parameters you want to
change. Commas act as placeholders for unchanged parameters.
The optional entry method reduces file size and increases the
speed at which files are sent to the printer.
Creating DOS Batch Files for Downloading
If you are downloading from an MS-DOS system, you can create
batch files to set communication values and download formats. It
is a good idea to create a subdirectory to hold your format files.
Here is a DOS batch file that sets a serial port, changes to a
subdirectory, and downloads a check digit file, format file, and
batch data file.
MODE COM1: 9600,N,8,1,P
CD\MONARCH
COPY LABEL1.CDS COM1
COPY LABEL1.FMT COM1
COPY LABEL1.BCH COM1
Refer to your DOS manual for more information on creating batch
files.
6-10 Printing

STATUS POLLING 7
This chapter explains how to use status polling.
There are two types of Status Polling:
NInquiry Request--information about the readiness of the printer.
NJob Request--information about the current (or last received) job
downloaded to the printer.
Status Polling 7-1

Inquiry Request (ENQ)
An ENQ character acts as a request for printer status information.
You can send an ENQ in front of, in the middle of, or immediately
following any packet downloaded to the printer. An ENQ is a
command that can be executed as part of a packet or sent on its
own (using a communications program). An ENQ is processed
immediately. The ENQ character is user defined.
The ENQ character does not appear as a
visible character; however, we are
representing the
ENQ character as E .
Inquiry Response
Printer status is returned to the host in a 3-byte (3-character)
sequence. The first byte is the non-printable user-defined ENQ
character, which is not visible on the response. The second and
third bytes are printer status codes. See the ENQ Reference
Tables for the meaning of bytes 2 and 3.
Example: E AB
The status codes (A and B in this case) are ASCII equivalents to
the hexadecimal bits that represent the various types of status
responses. This response indicates that the printer is online
(Character A) and that there is a stock fault (Character B).
Example: E ??
Indicates that this is the first ENQ response since the printer was
turned on. Send another ENQ immediately to receive the printer’s
status.
Example: E @@
Indicates the printer is offline.
7-2 Status Polling

The following graphics can be used as a quick reference for the
Status of Byte #2 and Byte #3. Byte #1 is the non-printable
user-defined ENQ character.
Status Polling 7-3

ENQ Reference Table - Byte #2
Char Const.
OFF
Const.
ON
Comp.
Failure
Corr.
Error
Online
Data
Error
Busy Active Online
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
@01 000000
A01000001
B01000010
C01000011
D01000100
E01000101
F01000110
G01000111
H01001000
I01001001
J01001010
K01001011
L01001100
M01001101
N01001110
O01001111
P01010000
Q01010001
R01010010
S01010011
T01010100
U01010101
V01010110
W01010111
X01011000
Y01011001
Z01011010
[01011011
\01011100
]01011101
^01011110
_01011111
‘01100000
A "1" indicates the bit is turned on. A "0"
indicates the bit is off.
7-4 Status Polling

ENQ Reference Table - Byte #2 (continued)
Char Const.
OFF
Const.
ON
Comp.
Failure
Corr.
Error
Online
Data
Error
Busy Active Online
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
a01100001
b01100010
c01100011
d01100100
e01100101
f01100110
g01100111
h01101000
i01101001
j01101010
k01101011
l01101100
m01101101
n01101110
o01101111
p01110000
q01110001
r01110010
s01110011
t01110100
u01110101
v01110110
w01110111
x01111000
y01111001
z01111010
{01111011
|01111100
}01111101
~01111110
Dec 127 01111111
A "1" indicates the bit is turned on. A "0"
indicates the bit is off.
Status Polling 7-5

ENQ Reference Table - Byte #3
Char Const.
OFF
Const.
ON
Low
Battery
Format
Error
Waiting
to
Dispense
Label
Ribbon
Fault
Stock
Fault
Online
Error
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
@01000000
A01000001
B01000010
C01000011
D01000100
E01000101
F01000110
G01000111
H01001000
I01001001
J01001010
K01001011
L01001100
M01011001
N01001110
O01001111
P01010000
Q01010001
R01010010
S01010011
T01010100
U01010101
V01010110
W01010111
X01011000
Y01011001
Z01011010
[01011011
\01011100
]01011101
^01011110
_01011111
‘01100000
A "1" indicates the bit is turned on. A "0"
indicates the bit is off.
7-6 Status Polling

ENQ Reference Table - Byte #3 (continued)
Char Const.
OFF
Const.
ON
Low
Battery
Format
Error
Waiting
to
Dispense
Label
Ribbon
Fault
Stock
Fault
Online
Error
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
a01100001
b01100010
c01100011
d01100100
e01100101
f01100110
g01100111
h01101000
i01101001
j01101010
k01101011
l01101100
m01101101
n01101110
o01101111
p01110000
q01110001
r01110010
s01110011
t01110100
u01110101
v01110110
w01110111
x01111000
y01111001
z01111010
{01111011
|01111100
}01111101
~01111110
Dec 127 01111111
A "1" indicates the bit is turned on. A "0"
indicates the bit is off.
Status Polling 7-7

Job Request
A Job Request returns status information about the most recently
processed print job. You can send a job request after an ENQ or
batch. You can send two levels of Job Requests:
NNumeric Error Codes Only (0, 1, or 2)
NVerbose (3 or 4)
Syntax {J,#}
Field Type Valid Options Description
Identifier JJob Status Request
request# 0
1
2
3
4
Returns ASCII coded strings or
numeric error codes
Returns error number
Returns number of labels printed in batch
Example {J,3}
The job response may not be immediate. If the printer has an
error (out of supplies, ribbon problem, etc.), is in pause mode, or
has insufficient memory, correct the problem and then resend the
job request. If the problem is not corrected, no response is
returned. If a formatting error has occurred, the job request will
return the status. The printer must first interpret the format and
batch data before returning the response.
You may need to press ENTER or FEED/CUT,
depending on your printer before the job
response is returned.
To clear an error, press ENTER or ESCAPE/CLEAR, depending
on your printer. An ENQ can also clear errors numbered less than
500. Once the error is corrected, a job request can be sent. The
printer cannot accept another job request until the error is
resolved.
7-8 Status Polling

Job Response
The Job Response varies, depending on the type of request sent
to the printer. The following syntax is the response for a Job 0,
1,or 2 request.
Syntax {J,Status1,Status2,"FMT-1","BCH-2"}
Status1 These errors stop the print job. Examples
include out of stock, supply faults, or data
formatting errors. These errors are numbered
less than 24 on the "Job Status 0, 1, 2
Response Table," later in this chapter.
Status2 These are errors in the syntax of the MPCL
data stream. Printing does not stop, but the
information may not print properly. These
errors are numbered greater than 24 on the
"Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table," later in
this chapter.
FMT-1/BCH-2 The format or batch number is returned.
Here is an example of a response returned to a J 0, 1, 2 request:
{J,8,0,"FMT-1","BCH-2"}
Indicates that a portion of the format extends off the tag in format
1, batch 2. Refer to the "Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table" later
in this chapter for brief explanations for J, 0, 1, 2 requests. In the
above example, refer to error 8 for an explanation.
Status Polling 7-9

The following syntax is the response for a Job 3 request. You
may need to press ENTER or FEED/CUT, depending on your
printer before the job response is returned.
Syntax {J,"Status1 A,B","Status2
A,B,C,D,E","FMT-1","BCH-2"}
"Status1 A,B" Status1 A contains the field number, in the
format or batch, where an error was found. If
the error is not in the format or batch, a "0" is
returned.
Status1 B contains an error number, which
represents the actual printer error. The error
numbers can be found in Chapter 8,
"Diagnostics and Errors."
Example {J,"2,612",}
2 is the field number where an error was found. 612 is the error
number, indicating that data is missing or does not match the
format definition for that field.
Error numbers found in Status1 B, always
have a value equal to or greater than 500.
These are considered very serious errors.
"Status2 A,B,C,D,E" contains the packet type, field type, field
number, parameter, and error number.
Status2
A- Packet Type
represents the MPCLII packet that the error
occurred on. The packet could be Format (F),
Batch (B), Check Digit (A), Graphic (G), or
Font (W).
7-10 Status Polling

Status2
B- Field Type
represents the MPCLII field that the error
occurred on. If the packet has no fields,
Status2 A will be replicated. If the error
occurs before the field is identified a question
mark is sent. Since the batch data is
variable, a D is sent to indicate data.
Status2
C- Field Number
represents the field number within each
packet. The packet header is the first field
and each subsequent field is indicated by the
field separator.
Status2
D- Parameter
represents the parameter within the field that
the error occurred. The numbering begins
after the field identifier.
Status2
E- Error Number
is the error that coincides with the error
numbers presented in Chapter 8, "Diagnostics
and Errors."
"FMT-1/BCH-2" The format or batch number is returned.
If more than one error occurred then only the
most serious error will be acknowledged.
{J,"","F,B,4,6,33","FMT-1","BCH-2"}
Indicates that an error occurred on a bar code (B) field within a
format (F) packet. The bar code field is the fourth (4) field in the
packet. The error occurred in the sixth (6) parameter of the field.
Error number 33 means the bar code density is invalid.
To clear an error, press ENTER or ESCAPE/CLEAR, depending
on your printer. An ENQ can also clear errors numbered less than
500. Once the error is corrected, a job request can be sent. The
printer cannot accept another job request until the error is
resolved.
Status Polling 7-11

The following syntax is the response for a Job 4 request.
Syntax {J,printed,total,"FMT-1","BCH-2"}
printed the number of tags or labels already printed
in the batch.
total the total number of tags or labels to be
printed in the current batch.
"FMT-1/BCH-2" The format or batch number is returned.
Example {J,8,25,"FMT-3","Bch-2"}
8 out of 25 tags or labels have been printed from format number 3.
Use a Job Request 4 when printing in the on-demand mode with a
large number of tags or labels from a single batch. A Job
Request 4 may not be accurate if tags or labels are printed in
continuous mode, because of the response time involved. A Job
Request 4 is not useful in single ticket batches (printing 1 of 1) or
multiple single ticket batches.
A batch has to be printing when you send the
job request. You cannot use this job
request on batches printing formats with
incrementing fields.
7-12 Status Polling

Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table (Status 1 Codes)
Number Meaning
0No error
1Stacker fault
2Supply problem
4Hot printhead
5Printhead open
6Insufficient memory
7Ribbon problem
8Field ## extends off tag
9Field ## has a bad font/bar code
10 Field ## contains invalid data
11 Field ## has a graphic missing
12 Invalid communication channel
13 Invalid file type
14 All communication channels are busy
15 Receive overrun error
16 Receive parity error
17 Receive framing error
18 Receive buffer full
19 Label waiting
21 Bad dots (verifier detected a failure)
23 Low battery
24 Memory configuration packet error
Numbers 25 through 50 are
not currently in use.
Status Polling 7-13

Job Status 0, 1, 2 Response Table (Status 2 Codes)
Number Meaning
51 Invalid command
52 Invalid separator value
53 Graphic not found
54 Format for batch not found
55 Quantity/Multiples out-of-range
56 Name descriptor too long
57 Invalid cut value
58 Invalid number-of-parts value
59 Invalid orientation value
60 Invalid thickness value
61 Invalid text field
62 Invalid bar code field
63 Data string too long
64 Invalid data field
65 Row greater than stock length
66 Row greater than format length
67 Column greater than printhead width
68 Column greater than format width
69 Invalid label length
70 Invalid label width
71 Invalid increment/decrement value
72 Identifier out-of-range
73 No field to create format
74 Stop location of a line is out of range
75 Syntax error
80 Can’t use offline format for online batch
81 Can’t queue graphic batch
82 Can’t store online format
83 Can’t queue online batch
84 Can’t queue online clear command
7-14 Status Polling

Status Polling Considerations for Script Mode
This information only applies to 9825 and 9850 printers running
scripts.
The following table shows the effects of the I Packet and the
9825 or 9850 printer’s front panel on status polling and immediate
commands.
I Packet Printer
Configuration
Packet
(inside the script or
sent online to the
printer)
While Running in Script Mode ONLY
(set through printer’s front panel)
Disabled Enabled
Status Polling OFF (status polling
not enabled by I
packet)
OFF (status polling
not enabled through
printer’s front panel)
OFF (status polling
enabled through
printer’s front panel)
ON (status polling
enabled by I packet)
OFF (status polling
not enabled through
printer’s front panel)
ON (status polling
enabled through
printer’s front panel)
Immediate
Commands OFF (immediate
commands not
enabled by I packet)
OFF (immediate
commands not
enabled through
printer’s front panel)
OFF (immediate
commands enabled
through printer’s
front panel)
ON (immediate
commands enabled
by I packet)
OFF (immediate
commands not
enabled through
printer’s front panel)
ON (immediate
commands enabled
through printer’s
front panel)
If status polling and immediate commands are NOT enabled
through the I Packet, enabling status polling and immediate
commands at the printer’s front panel has NO effect.
Status Polling 7-15

7-16 Status Polling

DIAGNOSTICS AND ERRORS 8
This chapter explains how to
Nprint a test label
Nreset the printer
Ncall Technical Support.
Before you call Service, print a test label. The label contains
information to help Service diagnose mechanical and setup
problems.
This chapter also provides explanations of your printer’s errors.
The errors are classified by type and are listed in order. If you
have trouble loading supplies or performing maintenance, refer to
the Operator’s Handbook.
Some errors numbered 400-438 and 500-574 are internal software
errors. Errors numbered 703-758 are supply errors. Follow the
directions provided with the error description to correct the
problem. Errors numbered 900-999 are Hard Printer Failures. If
you cannot clear an error, turn off the printer, wait several seconds
and then turn on the printer. Call Technical Support if you receive
any error message not listed in this chapter.
To clear a data error, press ENTER or ESCAPE/CLEAR,
depending on your printer. If a formatting error occurs, the label
prints; but data may be missing. Correct the format or batch and
resend them to the printer. If a data error occurs, press
FEED/CUT to queue and print an error label.
An error label is not available on
the 9403 printer.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-1

Printing a Test Label
1. From the User Diagnostics menu, press the right arrow until
you see
USER DIAG
Test Label
2. Press ENTER (ENTER/PAUSE). The 9825 and 9850 printers
print the test labels shown below.
On the 9403 printer, you will see
Print Quantity?
[1/999]: +1
3. Type the quantity of test labels you want to print.
Press ENTER. You will see
The test label shows the model number, software version, total
number of inches printed, voltage, print contrast, printhead
resistance, code page, MPCL control characters, ENQ and RS232
characters.
8-2 Diagnostics and Errors

Reading a Test Label
The 9825/9850 first label shows the printer’s configuration by
packet (A-M). See Chapter 2, "Configuring the Printer," for more
information. The lines beginning with M show the printer’s
memory allocation, which can be changed. The units for supply
position, etc. are displayed in dots, even if you entered them in
English or Metric units.
The second label shows the model number, software version, total
number of inches printed, number of inches printed by current
printhead, voltage, print contrast, printhead resistance, number of
bad dots, and installed options (see the following table). The test
label for the 9850 printer shows an inch count for the high energy
ribbon. The one-dot rule line at the bottom of the test label
indicates the vertical 0,0 point.
Installed Options Description
C Cutter (Knife)
M 256K memory expansion
PPeel mode
R RS-232 option (Keypad)
SStacker
V Verifier
If You Receive an Error Message
Any time you receive a message that is not described in this
manual, or the recommended action does not solve the problem,
call Technical Support. Some errors are the result of
communication problems. In this case, reset your printer and
reboot your computer. If you change any of the online
configuration packets, resend the format packet to the printer, so
the configuration changes take effect.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-3

If the PC and Printer Aren’t Communicating
If your PC is having trouble communicating with your printer,
follow these steps:
NCheck any messages that occur at the printer and at the
computer. See the following error message listing in this
chapter for more information.
NMake sure you are using the correct printer cable.
NMake sure the cable is plugged into the correct port on the
computer.
NCompare your printer’s communications settings (especially
flow control) with the settings on your PC. Your printer and
PC communications should match. Print a test label to identify
the printer’s communication settings.
NMake sure the printer is online (ready to receive data).
If all of the above are correct, reset your printer. Try the function
again. If you still can’t establish communications, call Technical
Support.
Resetting Printers
Sometimes, the printer receives mixed signals and loses its ability
to communicate. If this happens, reset the printer and attempt
communication again. To reset the printer, turn off the printer,
wait 15 seconds, and turn it back on.
When you turn off the printer, all the information set through the
online configuration packets (A-M) is saved. See the sections in
Chapter 2, "Configuring the Printer," for more information about
each packet.
8-4 Diagnostics and Errors

Calling Technical Support
Technical support representatives are available Monday through
Friday during regular business hours. Follow these steps before
you call:
1. Make sure your PC and printer are properly connected.
2. Record any error messages that occurred.
3. Try to recreate the problem, if you can.
4. Check your port settings. Your problem may be corrected
simply by changing the communication settings.
5. List any changes that have recently been made to the system.
Try to record what you did when the problem occurred.
6. Reset your printer. For information on resetting your printer,
see "Resetting Printers."
7. Reboot your computer. Refer to your computer
documentation for specific instructions.
8. Print a test label, see "Printing a Test Label."
Have the following information ready before you call: computer
brand name and model, version of DOS, Monarch printer model,
other peripheral devices on your system, support agreement,
contract number, or invoice information, customer number, and
printer serial number.
Additional Diagnostics Information
For detailed printer diagnostics information, refer to the Quick
Reference or Operator’s Handbook. See Chapter 7, "Status
Polling," for information on requesting printer and job status. See
the following error message listing in this chapter for more
information.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-5

Reading an Error Label
An error label queues and prints on the 9825/9850 printers when
you press FEED/CUT after a data error (0-499) occurs. An error
label is not available on the 9403 printer. The error label
contains the packet type, field type, line number, and error
number. The packet and field type return the first letter after the {
or p . A "?" is returned if the letter cannot be determined. The
line number refers to which line in the packet the error occurs.
The error number is the three-digit error code. Use this
information to correct the format, batch, font, check digit, graphic,
or online configuration packet.
The first label shows an error in line 8, which is a constant text
field within the format packet. The error number is 18.
The second label shows an error in line 1 of the batch packet.
The error number is 101.
Data Errors
Errors 001 to 499 are data errors. These errors are returned in
response to a J,3 request. See Chapter 7, "Status Polling," for
more information. A data error indicates that incorrect data was
received from the host, causing the printer to ignore the entire
print job. After checking the packet and correcting the problem,
transmit the print job again.
The following is a list of data errors. These errors occur because
data in the format, batch, check digit, font, or graphic packet is
invalid.
8-6 Diagnostics and Errors

Error
Code
Description
001 Packet ID number must be 1 to 999.
002 Name must be 1 to 8 characters inside quotes or a
printer-assigned name ("").
003 Action must be A (add) or C (clear).
004 Supply length is invalid. See "Defining the Format
Header" in Chapter 3 for valid lengths.
005 Supply width is invalid. See "Defining the Format
Header" in Chapter 3 for valid widths.
006 Storage device must be F (Flash), R (volatile RAM), or
T (temporary for graphics).
007 Unit of measure must be E (English), M (Metric), or G
(Dots). See "Defining the Format Header" in Chapter 3
for information.
010 Field ID number is outside the range 0 to 999 or 0 to 99
depending on your printer.
011 Field length exceeds 2710 or 100 depending on your
printer.
012 Row field position is greater than the maximum stock
dimension. See "Defining Text Fields" in Chapter 3 for
valid row lengths.
013 Column field position is greater than the maximum stock
dimension. See "Defining Text Fields" in Chapter 3 for
valid column widths.
014 Font style must be 1, 2, 3, 4, 10, 11, 15, 16, 17, 18, or
50. See "Defining Text Fields" in Chapter 3 or Appendix
B, "Fonts," for more information.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-7

015 Character rotation must be 0 (0 degree), 1 (90 degree),
2 (180 degree), or 3 (270 degree). See "Defining Text
Fields" in Chapter 3 for information.
016 Field rotation must be 0 (0 degree), 1 (90 degree), 2
(180 degree), or 3 (270 degree). See "Defining Text
Fields" in Chapter 3 for information.
017 Field restriction must be V (variable) or F (fixed).
018 Code page selection defined in the field must be 0
(Internal), 1 (ANSI), 100 (Macintosh), 101 (Wingdings),
102 (UNICODE), 103 (BIG5 for UNICODE), 104
(GB2312 for UNICODE), 105 (SJIS for UNICODE), 106
(GB2312), 107 (BIG5), 437 (DOS Page 437), 850 (DOS
Page 850), 852 (Latin 2), 855 (Russian), 857 (Turkish),
860 (Portuguese), 1250 (Latin 2), 1251 (Cyrillic), 1252
(Latin 1), 1253 (Greek), 1254 (Turkish), 1255 (Hebrew),
1256 (Arabic), 1257 (Baltic), or 1258 (Vietnamese).
020 Vertical magnification must be 1 to 7 or 4 to 255 for the
scalable or downloaded TrueType fonts.
021 Horizontal magnification must be 1 to 7 or 4 to 255 for
the scalable or downloaded TrueType fonts.
022 Color must be A, B, D, E, F, N, O, R, S, T, or W. See
"Defining Text Fields" in Chapter 3 for more information.
023 Intercharacter gap must be 0 to 99 dots.
024 Field justification must be B (balanced), C (centered), E
(end), L (left), or R (right). See "Defining Text Fields" in
Chapter 3 for more information.
025 String length is outside the range 0 to 2710 or 0 to 100
depending on your printer.
030 Bar code height must be at least 19 (English), 48
(Metric), 38 (203 Dots), 57 (300 Dots), or is not within
the supply dimensions.
8-8 Diagnostics and Errors

031 Human readable option must be
0default
1no CD or NS
5NS at bottom, no CD
6CD at bottom, no NS
7CD and NS at bottom
8no text
032 Bar code type is invalid. See "Defining Bar Code
Fields" in Chapter 3 for valid options.
033 Bar code density is invalid. See "Defining Bar Code
Fields" in Chapter 3 for the bar code density chart.
040 Line thickness must be 0 to 99 dots.
041 Line direction must be 0, 90, 180, or 270.
042 End row is invalid. Line segment or box end row is
defined outside of printable area.
043 End column is invalid. Line segment or box end column
is defined outside of printable area.
044 Dot pattern for line or box must be "".
045 Line length is defined beyond the maximum length.
See "Defining Line Fields" in Chapter 3 for valid lengths.
046 Line type must be S (segment) or V (vector).
051 Imaging mode in the graphic header must be 0.
101 The format referenced by batch is not in memory.
102 Print quantity is outside the range 0 to 32000.
104 Batch mode must be N (new) or U (update).
105 Batch separator must be 0 (Off), 1 (On), 2 (Double) in
the batch control field.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-9

106 Print multiple is outside the range 1 to 999.
107 Cut multiple is outside the range 0 to 999. Only valid
for printers with a knife.
108 Multiple part supply is outside the range 1 to 5.
109 Cut type is outside the range 0 to 4.
200 Option number must be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 20, 30, 31, 42, 50,
51, 52, 60, or 61.
201 Copy length is outside the range 0 to 2710 or 0 to 100
depending on your printer.
202 Copy start position must be 1 to 2710 or 1 to 100
depending on your printer.
203 Destination start position must be 1 to 2710 or 1 to 100
depending on your printer.
204 Source field must be 0 to 999 or 0 to 99 depending on
your printer.
205 Copy type must be 1 (copy after rules) or 2 (copy
before rules).
206 Increment/Decrement selection must be I (increment) or
D (decrement).
207 Incrementing start position must be 0 to 2710 or 0 to
100 depending on your printer.
208 Incrementing end position must be 0 to 2710 or 0 to 100
depending on your printer.
209 The incrementing amount must be 0 to 999.
210 Security value for a PDF417 bar code must be 0 to 8.
Correct the value and resend the format to the printer.
8-10 Diagnostics and Errors

211 Narrow element value is less than 1 or greater than 99.
Correct the value and resend the format to the printer.
212 Wide element value is less than 1 or greater than 99.
Correct the value and resend the format to the printer.
213 Dimension must be 1 to 30 for a column or 3 to 90 for a
row on a PDF417 bar code.
214 Truncation code must be S (standard) or T (truncated
bar code).
215 Aspect code must be C (columns) or R (rows).
216 Option definition must be S (set) or T (template).
217 Input device device must be D (Default), H (Host), K
(Keyboard), N (None), or S (Scanner).
218 Pad direction must be L (from left) or R (from right).
219 Pad character is outside the range 0 to 255.
220 Check digit selection must be G to generate check digit.
221 Primary or secondary price format is outside the range
1 to 16.
222 Data type restriction is outside the range of 1 to 6.
223 Option is not valid for the field.
224 Bar code Intercharacter gap must be 0 to 99 dots.
(This is also known as the additional character gap
when using Option 50, Defining Bar Code Densities.)
251 Power up mode must be 0 (online) or 1 (offline).
252 Language selection must be 0 (English), 1 (French), 2
(German), 3 (Spanish).
253 Batch separator code must be 0 (off), 1 (on), or 2
(Double) in the System Setup Packet.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-11

254 Slash zero selection must be 0 (standard zero) or 1
(slash zero).
255 Supply type must be 0 (black mark), 1 (die cut), 2
(non-indexed), or 3 (aperture).
256 Ribbon selection must be 0 (direct), 1 (transfer) or 2
(High Energy).
257 Feed mode must be 0 (continuous) or 1 (on-demand).
258 Supply position is outside the range. See "Defining the
Supply Setup Packet" in Chapter 2 for more information.
259 Contrast adjustment must be -390 to 156 dots.
260 Print adjustment must be -99 to 99 dots.
261 Margin adjustment must be -99 to 99 dots.
262 Speed adjustment must be 0 (default), 20 (2.0 ips), 25
(2.5 ips), 40 (4.0 ips), 60 (6.0 ips), 80 (8.0 ips), or 10
(10.0 ips).
263 Primary monetary symbol is invalid. See "Defining the
Monetary Formatting Packet" in Chapter 2 for more
information.
264 Secondary symbol selection must be 0 (none) or 1
(print secondary sign).
265 Monetary decimal places must be 0 to 3.
266 Character string length in the control characters packet
must be 5 (MPCL control characters) or 7 (ENQ/IMD
command character).
267 Baud rate selection must be 0 (1200), 1 (2400), 2
(4800), 3 (9600), 4 (19200), 5 (38400), 6 (57600), or 7
(115200). Resend the communication settings packet
or check the DIP switch settings.
8-12 Diagnostics and Errors

268 Word length selection must be 0 (7 bits), or 1 (8 bits).
Resend the communication settings packet or check the
DIP switch settings.
269 Stop bits selection must be 0 (1 bit), or 1 (2 bits).
Resend the communication settings packet or check the
DIP switch settings.
270 Parity selection must be 0 (none), 1 (odd), or 2 (even).
Resend the communication settings packet or check the
DIP switch settings.
271 Flow control selection must be 0 (none), 1 (DTR), 2
(CTS/RTS), or 3 (XON/XOFF). Resend the
communication settings packet or check the DIP switch
settings.
272 Internal code page selection must be 0 (Internal), 1
(ANSI), 2 (DOS 437), 3 (DOS 850), 4 (1250- Latin 2), 5
(1251- Cyrillic), 6 (1252- Latin 1), 7 (1253- Greek), 8
(1254- Turkish), 9 (1255- Hebrew), 10 (1256- Arabic), 11
(1257- Baltic), 12 (1258- Vietnamese), 13 (852- Latin 2),
14 (855- Russian), 15 (857- IBM Turkish), 16 (860- DOS
Portuguese), 17 (Wingdings), 18 (Macintosh), 19
(UNICODE), 20 (BIG5), 21 (GB), 22 (SJIS to SJIS), 23
(GB to GB), 24 (BIG5 to BIG5), or 25 (KSC to KSC).
273 Cut adjustment must be -300 to 300 dots.
282 RS232 Trailer string is too long. Use a maximum of 3
characters.
283 ENQ Trailer string is too long. Use a maximum of 3
characters.
284 The buffer type must be T (Transmit), R (Receive), I
(Image), F (Format), or D (Downloadable Fonts).
285 The storage device type in the memory configuration
packet must be N (non-volatile RAM) or R (volatile
RAM).
Diagnostics and Errors 8-13

286 The buffer size is invalid.
287 The printhead width must be 0.
288 The battery voltage must be 0 (15-volt battery) or 1
(12-volt battery).
289 The printer address specified in the communication
settings packet must use exactly six characters.
290 Action must be 0 (disable) or 1 (enable) for the
backfeed control packet or the printer is active.
291 Dispense position must be 50 to 200 dots and the
backfeed distance is greater than the dispense position
or the printer is active.
292 Backfeed distance must be 10 to 200 dots or the printer
is active.
310 Check digit scheme number must be 1 to 10.
311 Modulus must be 2 to 11.
314 Check digit algorithm must be D (sum of digits) or P
(sum of products).
325 Duplicating direction must be 0 (insert after) or 1 (insert
before) in duplicate fields for graphics.
327 Amount of row adjustment must be 0 to 999 (0 to 99
depending on your printer) dots in duplicate fields for
graphics.
328 Duplicate count must be 0 to 999 (0 to 99 depending on
your printer).
340 Bitmap line encoding must be H (hex) or R (run length).
350 Font selector must be 1 to 9999.
351 Font data length must be 68 to 16384.
8-14 Diagnostics and Errors

352 Insufficient font memory is available for the downloaded
font.
380 Job request is outside the range 0 to 4.
400 The character immediately following { is invalid.
402 Field separator is not in the expected location.
403 Field separator was not found.
404 The number or string that is currently being processed
is too long.
405 Too many fields exist in the format. You cannot have
more than 1000 (or 100 depending on your printer)
fields in the format. Lines, boxes, and constant text
fields count as fields.
409 The printer memory is full. Delete unnecessary formats
or graphics from memory. If you are using a graphic file
that is very large, consider using another mapping
method (such as run length encoding) to reduce the
required memory.
Communication Failures
Errors 410 to 413 are usually caused by a hardware failure, by an
incorrect SETUP option or by the host ignoring flow control
(XON/OFF, CTS/RTS or DTR). Communication settings:
Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
Word length 7 or 8
Stop bits 1 or 2
Parity Odd, Even, None
Flow control None, XON/XOFF, DTR, CTS
410 Parity on the printer does not match the parity on the
host. Check the parity setting under SETUP options.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-15

411 Framing error. The printer cannot communicate with the
host. Make sure the host is turned on, communication
cables are connected correctly, port settings are correct,
and communications are active. Check the baud rate,
word length, and stop bits to make sure they match those
at the host. Do not toggle between Microsoft® Windows®
and MS-DOS, while using the COPY command, or you
will receive a framing error. Exit Windows before using
the COPY command. Re-transmit the data.
412 There is a problem with flow control between the printer
and the host. Make sure the printer and the host flow
control settings match (both are DTR or both are
XON/XOFF). If the error persists, call Technical
Support.
413 Online receive queue is full. Check your printer’s
XON/XOFF or DTR SETUP values to be sure there isn’t
a flow control problem.
414 The internal keyboard buffer is full or you need a new
keypad. Call Technical Support.
415 The buffer size you defined exceeds the total available
in your machine.
416 Flash/PC board error. Call Technical Support.
417 Flash memory is full. Clear flash through the printer’s
menu. Resend the format, graphic, and check digit
packets. If the error reappears, call Technical Support.
420 Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
421 Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
422 Duplicate internal name. Call Technical Support.
423 Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
424 Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
8-16 Diagnostics and Errors

425 Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
426 Internal software list error. Call Technical Support.
427 Format name is invalid. Valid name is 1 - 8 characters
inside quotes or "" for a printer-assigned name. Press
ENTER or ESCAPE/CLEAR, depending on your printer
and try to continue. If the error reappears, call Technical
Support.
428 Batch name is invalid or graphic not found. Press
ENTER or ESCAPE/CLEAR, depending on your
printer and try to continue. If the error reappears, call
Technical Support.
429 A field number appears more than once in a format.
430 The format uses a graphic file that cannot be found.
433 The batch references a field number that does not exist
in the format.
497 An error occurred during the loop back test on the
parallel port. Call Service.
499 An error occurred during the loop back test on the serial
port. Call Service.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-17

Data Formatting Failures
Formatting errors indicate that a field will print incorrectly. After
you have checked the data stream and corrected the data,
retransmit the format and batch.
For errors 571-622, the batch will still print,
but the field, font, bar code, or density may
be incomplete, missing or contain
incorrect data.
571 UPC or EAN bar code data length is invalid. The bar
code data length in the batch does not fit the format.
572 A copy field, padded field, or incrementing field length
is invalid. The field length in the batch does not fit the
format or the field contains blanks. Or, the fixed length
field does not contain the specified number of
characters.
573 Price field length is invalid. The price field length in the
batch does not fit the format or the field contains blanks.
574 No CD scheme or room for CD. The CD scheme in the
batch does not fit the format or the field contains blanks.
575 The graphic included in your format could not be found.
Resend the graphic packet. If the error persists, call
Technical Support.
600 The printer could not image the batch, because the
batch was refused. Call Technical Support.
601 An error occurred while imaging the batch. Resend the
format, batch, font, and/or any graphic packets. If the
error persists, call Technical Support.
603 The batch was not found while imaging. Resend the
batch packet. If the error persists, call Technical
Support.
8-18 Diagnostics and Errors

611 Font, bar code or density is invalid. The font, bar code
or density in the batch does not fit the format.
612 The data in this line of the batch is either missing or
does not match the format.
613 Reference point off tag.
614 Portion of field off tag. There may be an invalid
character in the packet. Make sure you did not enter O
for Ø.
615 Bar code width is greater than 16 inches or the number
of keywords for your PDF 417 bar code exceeds 928.
Decrease the density or shorten the amount of data to
print the bar code.
616 A bad dot falls on a bar code and the dot cannot be
shifted. A gray box is printed instead of the bar code.
However, 2D bar codes still print on the 9825/9850
printers when bad dots are present within the bar code
field.
618 Magnification must be 1 to 7 or 4 to 255 for the scalable
font.
619 The JIS (16-bit) code for Kanji is invalid.
620 Font and printhead dot density mismatch. A 300 dpi
font is specified in the format, but a 203 dpi printhead is
used in the printer or vice-versa. Check the font or
change the printhead to correct the error.
621 An error occurred opening the TrueType font file. Select
a different font to download. If the error message
persists, call Technical Support.
622 Not enough memory to create the downloaded TrueType
characters in the scalable (vector) fonts buffer.
Reconfigure the printer’s memory and increase the
scalable (vector) fonts buffer. Resend the font, format,
and batch packet after reconfiguring the memory. See
Diagnostics and Errors 8-19

"Reconfiguring Memory" for more information. If the
error message persists, call Technical Support.
Machine Faults
These errors occur when there is a problem with the printer.
703 The printer sensed a calibration of different-sized black
marks. Make sure the correct supply is loaded.
704 Printer has not sensed a supply mark within the
specified number of inches or out of supplies.
Check the
✦supply tracking
✦supply marks
✦black mark sensor position
✦supply roll for binding.
Press ENTER or ESCAPE/CLEAR, depending on your
printer. If the error continues to appear, change the
supply.
750 Printhead is overheated. Turn off the printer to let the
printhead cool. If the error persists, call Technical
Support.
751 Printer did not sense a black mark when expected.
For errors 751-753, Check the
✦supply tracking
✦supply marks
✦black mark sensor position
✦supply roll for binding.
Press ENTER or ESCAPE/CLEAR, depending on your
printer and try to continue printing. If the error
continues to appear, change the supply.
8-20 Diagnostics and Errors

752 Printer sensed a mark in the wrong place.
753 Printer sensed a mark that is too long.
754 Printer has a ribbon problem. Check the ribbon for a
jam or remove any slack by turning the take-up reel
clockwise. Load a new ribbon.
755 Printhead is open. Close the printhead before
continuing. If the error persists, call Technical Support.
756 The printer is out of supplies. Load supplies.
757 Load supplies. The calibrated supply length differs by
plus or minus .25 inches from the format. Press
ESCAPE, FEED/CUT, or the up arrow (9403) to print
on the current supply or load new supply and press
ENTER/PAUSE.
758 Check supply. Either the supply is not seen or the
on-demand sensor is broken. Check for a label jam.
Clear the supply path or reload supplies. This error
may occur if you remove a label too quickly in
on-demand mode. The printer does not recalibrate
after this error.
759 Knife is not moving. Call Technical Support.
760 Knife jam. Call Technical Support.
761 The stacker is full or jammed. Empty the stacker or
clear the jam before continuing. The printer does not
recalibrate after this error.
762 Low battery. Recharge the battery.
763 Waiting to dispense label. Press ENTER or FEED/CUT,
depending on your printer.
764 Verifier failure. Check the verifier by referring to your
verifier’s manual. The printer does not recalibrate after
this error. Call Technical Support.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-21

765 The printhead has less than 8 bad dots (4 dots for
9403/9850 printers). The printer can shift bar code
fields to avoid bad dots. You may need to press
ESCAPE/CLEAR to continue printing. Print a test label
to confirm the number of bad dots.
768 Printhead has more than 30 bad dots (10 dots for
9403/9850 printers) or is not connected. Make sure the
printhead is connected.
770 The print motor is not ready. Call Technical Support.
771 The format specified by the application was not found.
Reload your application and format, and try again. If
the problem continues, call Technical Support.
790 Wait until the printer is idle (no batch waiting to print or
not receiving data) before you send any packets. This
error may occur when you try to print a test label if the
printer is busy.
791 The printer has an error pending. Turn off the printer.
Wait 15 seconds and turn it back on. Resend the
packets. If the problem continues, call Technical
Support.
792 The printer is not initialized. Call Technical Support.
793 The printer job queue is full. Turn off the printer. Wait
15 seconds and turn it back on. Resend the packets. If
the problem continues, call Technical Support.
850 Invalid script packet or not enough flash memory for the
script. The script download failed. Format flash
memory and download the script using the COPY
command from DOS or the ADK2 software.
851 Invalid lookup table or not enough flash memory for the
script. The lookup table download failed. Check the
data in the lookup table. Format flash memory and
download the script using the COPY command from
DOS or the ADK2 software.
8-22 Diagnostics and Errors

852 Invalid buffer definition packet or not enough flash
memory for the script. One or more of the following
buffers were invalid: input buffer, temporary buffer,
lookup buffer, printer, or array buffer. Check the buffer
definitions. Format flash memory and download the
script using the COPY command from DOS or the ADK2
software.
853 Invalid version string or not enough flash memory for
the script. The version information in the APPVERSION
command is missing or invalid. Make sure the
information is enclosed in double quotation marks.
Format flash memory and download the script using the
COPY command from DOS or the ADK2 software.
854 Invalid table (string and numeric) data or not enough
flash memory for the script. Check the data. Format
flash memory and download the script using the COPY
command from DOS or the ADK2 software.
855 Invalid start/clear command. The script is missing the
start or clear command {S space}.
856 Invalid quit command. The script is missing the quit
command
{Q space}.
857 Illegal command in the script. Your script may include
commands that have been removed from the ADK2
scripting language.
858 Check sum error. Each packet has a four-digit
checksum at the beginning of the packet. Compile the
script again using the ADK2 software.
859 Script download buffer overflow. The image buffer is
used as the SCRATCH buffer. Increase the size of the
image buffer.
900 RAM test failure.
901 ROM/EPROM checksum failure.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-23

902 Software timer failure.
903 Software interrupt failure.
905 Illegal interrupt.
906 Non-maskable interrupt. Check format packet for font
clear or format clear packets.
907 Low RAM error.
908 Non Volatile RAM checksum failure.
909 RAM corrupted.
910 Warm restart.
911 Version string mismatch.
Errors numbered 900-911 occur when you turn on the printer.
They may indicate a circuit board failure. Errors numbered
930-940 are errors that may occur during the loading of flash
memory. Errors numbered 950-999 indicate a circuit board
failure. Call Technical Support if you receive any of these
messages.
When a HARD failure (errors 900-999) occurs on the printer, the
printer displays WARNING or POWER DOWN on the top line of
the keypad display.
If this happens, record the displayed message and turn off the
printer. If the problem reoccurs when you turn the printer on
again, call Technical Support.
If the problem does not reoccur after you turn your printer on
again, reset your printer’s SETUP options. Retransmit your
packets.
8-24 Diagnostics and Errors

Printer
Display
Description
WARNING
RAM Test Failure
RAM check failed on power up. Reset
your SETUP options. Transmit your
packets again.
POWER DOWN
ROM Sum Failure
ROM checksum test failed.
POWER DOWN
Timer Failure
Timer test failed.
POWER DOWN
Intr Test Failure
Interrupt test failed.
POWER DOWN
Low System RAM
Not enough RAM for system. Reset your
SETUP options. Transmit your packets
again.
POWER DOWN
Illegal Intr#
Illegal interrupt occurred.
POWER DOWN
NMI Received
Non-maskable interrupt occurred. Reset
your SETUP options. Transmit your
packets again.
POWER DOWN
Low Appl RAM
Not enough RAM for application. Reset
your SETUP options. Transmit your
packets again.
POWER DOWN
NVRAM Sum Fail
RAM checksum test failed. Reset your
SETUP options. Transmit your packets
again.
POWER DOWN
RAM Corrupt
Item storage RAM failed. Reset your
SETUP options. Transmit your packets
again.
Diagnostics and Errors 8-25

8-26 Diagnostics and Errors

PRINTER OPTIMIZATION 9
This chapter provides information on how to improve your printer’s
performance by
Nadjusting the print quality
Nreducing the imaging time for printing
Nproviding general tips and hints for designing formats.
This printer uses "smart imaging" to image and print fields on
supplies. Smart imaging remembers the exact boundaries and
locations of each field and places a boundary box (white space)
around each field. When a field changes that particular boundary
box is cleared and the new field data is imaged. However, the new
field data may require a larger boundary box than the previous
field did. In some cases, neighboring fields that do not change
may be covered with white space from the changing field’s
boundary box. To prevent existing fields from being covered by a
changing field, see "Option 61 (Reimage Field)" in Chapter 4.
Smart imaging is automatically disabled on formats with
a Data Matrix bar code.
Adjusting the Print Quality
Many factors affect print quality: type of supplies, print speed,
print contrast, and the type of printer’s application. This printer
supports both thermal transfer and thermal direct supplies. The
type of supply should match the printer’s application.
NIf you want to print at high speeds, you should use
premium supplies. Using premium supplies reduces
smudged images, hard to read labels, and faded print.
Supply type, print speed, and print contrast work together
to improve the print quality of labels. Contact your
Monarch Representative for more information.
Printer Optimization 9-1

NSelect the print speed based on desired throughput and print
quality. If print quality is more important, reduce the print
speed, because a lower print speed increases the print quality
of labels. If throughput is more important, increase the print
speed as high as it will go to give you the needed print
performance. See "Increasing Throughput" for more
information.
NIf the print quality is too light or too dark, adjust the print
contrast. The correct contrast setting is important because it
effects how well your bar codes scan and how long the
printhead lasts.
Be sure to check the print quality of bar codes with a bar code
verifier or scanner. If you do not have a verifier or scanner,
check the bar code visually. A bar code that is IN SPEC will
have complete bars and clear spaces. Small alphanumeric
characters will look complete. A bar code that is IN SPEC
may not look as good as one that is too dark, but it will have
the highest scan rate.
For highest scan rates, make sure there is
adequate white space before and after the
bar code. Also, a darker bar code does not
mean it will scan better.
Dark IN SPEC Light
9-2 Printer Optimization

NWhen designing formats, keep in mind the following non-print
zones on the 9403 printer.
Top and Bottom .035 inches
Left and Right Edges .10 inches
The following non-print zones are recommended for the 9800
series printers:
All Supplies .050 inches on either edge of the label.
All Supplies .020 inches at the end of the label.
If using the optional verifier, allow a minimum no-scan zone at the
top of the label of 1.3" (33 mm) for speeds 6.0 ips or less; 1.8"
(46 mm) for 8.0 ips; and 2.2" (56 mm) for 10.0 ips.
Reducing Imaging Time
Imaging time is the time it takes the printer to image the data for
the first label after the printer receives the format and batch
packet. There are several ways to reduce the imaging time: send
formats and configurations once, use a batch quantity of zero, or
update batch fields.
NIf the formats use the same check digit scheme, you only need
to send the check digit scheme once.
NSend formats once and use the batch update field to change
information on the label. Using a batch update field reduces
the imaging time, because only the fields that change are
imaged. All other fields remain the same as the last queued
batch.
NUse the batch quantity zero method when your application
requires operator intervention to enter data. While the
operator is entering data, the previous field is sent with a
batch quantity of zero. The printer images the field, but does
not print it. After the operator enters the data for the last field,
the batch quantity can be specified. The last remaining field is
imaged, and the label prints almost immediately.
Printer Optimization 9-3

To pre-image a label:
1. Send the format and a batch header in one file. The first time
you send the batch header, use the parameter N (new batch),
and the parameter 0 for (zero quantity).
Example {B,1,N,0 p }
The printer images constant text, line, box, and graphic fields, but
does not print them.
2. Input data for each field, and send it with a batch header
using the parameter U (update) and a quantity of zero. When
the printer receives the data, it immediately images the field,
but does not print it.
Example {B,1,U,0 p
1,"RODGER DIST CTR" p }
{B,1,U,0 p
2,"8292" p }
At this time, the printer is imaging all associated fields, including
fields that copy from other fields.
3. Repeat step 2 for each field except the last one.
{B,1,U,0 p
3,"BROADWAY" p }
{B,1,U,0 p
4,"555 WEST OAK AVE." p }
4. For the last field, input data and send it with the quantity of
labels you want printed. When the printer receives input for
the last field, it immediately prints the labels.
Example {B,1,U,10 p
5,"DAYTON, OHIO" p }
9-4 Printer Optimization

Increasing Throughput
Reducing the imaging time increases throughput. You can also
increase the baud rate to increase the transmission time and
increase throughput. Make sure the communication settings at
the printer match those at the host. Using a baud rate of 19200 is
almost twice as fast as 9600 baud. Using a baud rate of 38400 is
almost twice as fast as 19200 baud.
General Format Tips and Hints
The following tips and hints are helpful to keep in mind when
designing MPCLII formats.
With Formats
NIf you want to modify your format fields, check digit fields, and
configuration commands, use the optional entry method. This
method enables you to reset only the parameters you want to
change. Commas act as placeholders for unchanged
parameters. The optional entry method reduces file size and
increases the speed at which files are sent to the printer.
With Packets
NLeave parameters blank that you do not need to change when
sending online configuration packets. For example,
{I,A,,,,1 p } prints a slashed zero and uses the last sent
online system setup parameters.
Printer Optimization 9-5

You can group fields with similar parameters. For example
T,1,10,V,250,50,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0 p
T,2,15,,,75 p
T,3,,,,100 p
The first text field sets all the parameters for that field. The
second text field’s number of characters and column location
changes from what was defined in the first field. In the third text
field, only the column location is changed. This method can be
used on bar code and constant text fields as well.
You should understand the basics of each
field before using this method.
After you modify any fields or parameters with the optional entry
method, resend the format, batch, or configuration packet to the
printer.
With Bar Codes
NBe careful when rotating or placing a UPC/EAN bar code with
human readable characters, because the bottom reference
point is at the bottom of the bars, not at the bottom of the
human readable characters.
With Fields
NData that remains the same for each label should be in a
constant text field. Data that varies for each label should be
in a text field.
NCheck for trailing spaces in text or constant text fields if you
receive a "field off tag" error. An easy way to see trailing
spaces is to print the field in the reverse font.
NMake sure if you magnify a field, it does not go off the label or
cover another field. Magnifying a field increases the distance
between the printed character and the edge of the cell.
9-6 Printer Optimization

SAMPLES A
This appendix contains sample formats. You can customize any of
these formats to meet your needs.
Samples A-1

Sample UPCA Format Packet
{F,25,A,R,M,508,508,"Fmt 25" p
C,250,80,0,1,2,1,W,C,0,0,"MONARCH MARKING" p
B,1,12,F,110,115,1,2,120,5,L,0 p
T,2,18,V,30,30,1,1,1,1,B,C,0,0 p }
Sample Batch Packet
{B,25,N,1 p
1,"12345678901" p
2,"DAYTON, OHIO" p }
A-2 Samples

Sample MaxiCode Packets
MaxiCode is a two-dimensional bar code developed by UPS
(United Parcel Service, Inc.). Data must be defined in a specific
way for UPS. Refer to the Guide to Bar Coding with UPS or the
AIM MaxiCode Specification for more details about data
requirements.
The printers support Modes 0, 1, 2, and 3. Contact Monarch for
information about additional MaxiCode modes.
Mode Description
0 Obsolete
1 Obsolete
2 Structured Message
3 Structured Message
You can select which mode to use in the bar code field or allow
the printer to auto-select the mode (0, 2, or 3) based on your
data. See "Defining a Bar Code Field" for more information.
MaxiCode automatically pads data with the "!" character.
MaxiCode does not support
the NULL character.
Modes 2 and 3 are defined by the way the postal code, class of
service, and country code fields are arranged. (The postal code,
class of service, and country code are required fields.) Begin
with the message header, then the primary data (15 characters),
followed by the secondary message (up to 78 characters). Or,
begin with the primary data, then the message header, followed
by the secondary data. If the postal code data characters are all
numeric then the MaxiCode symbol is set to Mode 2. If the
characters are alphanumeric, or only contain ASCII characters 65
to 90, then the MaxiCode symbol is set to Mode 3.
Samples A-3

If you receive an error 612, check your MaxiCode data. You may
have not correctly structured or left out one of the three required
fields (postal code, class of service, and country code) or the
"~029" character. Use these updated format and batch packets
with the following firmware:
N9403 1.0 or greater
N9825 1.0 or greater
N9850 1.0 or greater
Mode 0 (Obsolete) Sample
{F,1,A,R,E,0600,0400,"MAXICODE" p
B,1,99,V,050,150,33,7,0,8,L,0 p } MaxiCode bar code (33)
{B,1,N,1 p Batch header
1,"450660000" p Postal code- zip code
(This field determines Mode)
C,"001" p Country code
C,"840" p Class of service
C,"[)~030" p Message header
C,"01~02996" p Transportation header
C,"1Z12345678~029" p Tracking number
C,"UPSN~029" p Origin carrier SCAC
C,"12345A~029" p UPS shipper number
C,"070~029" p Julian day of pickup
C,"~029" p Shipment ID (empty)
C,"1/1~029" p Package count
C,"15~029" p Weight (lb.)
C,"Y~029" p Address validation
C,"60 SADDLEBROOK CT.~029" p Street address (empty)
C,"DAYTON~029" p City (empty)
C,"OH~030" p State
C,"~004" p } EOT
A-4 Samples

Mode 2 Sample
{F,1,A,R,E,400,400,"MAXI_M2" p
B,1,99,V,040,140,33,7,0,8,L,0 p } MaxiCode bar-code (33)
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"[)>~030" p Message header
C,"01~02996" p Transportation header
C,"068100000~029" p Postal Code
(This field determines Mode)
C,"840~029" p Country code
C,"001~029" p Class of service
C,"1Z12345675~029" p Tracking number
C,"UPSN~029" p Origin carrier SCAC
C,"12345E~029" p UPS shipper number
C,"089~029" p Julian day of pickup
C,"~029" p Shipment ID (empty)
C,"1/1~029" p Package count
C,"10~029" p Weight (lb.)
C,"Y~029" p Address validation
C,"~029" p Street address (empty)
C,"~029" p City (empty)
C,"CT~030" p State
C,"~004" p } EOT
Samples A-5

Mode 3 Sample
{F,1,A,R,E,400,400,"MAXI_M3" p
B,1,99,V,040,140,33,7,0,8,L,0 p } MaxiCode bar-code (33)
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"[)>~030" p Message header
C,"01~02996" p Transportation header
C,"M5E1G45~029" p Postal Code
(This field determines Mode)
C,"124~029" p Country code
C,"066~029" p Class of service
C,"1Z12345679~029" p Tracking number
C,"UPSN~029" p Origin carrier SCAC
C,"12345E~029" p UPS shipper number
C,"089~029" p Julian day of pickup
C,"~029" p Shipment ID (empty)
C,"1/1~029" p Package count
C,"10~029" p Weight (lb.)
C,"Y~029" p Address validation
C,"~029" p Street address (empty)
C,"TORONTO~029" p City (empty)
C,"ON~030" p State
C,"~004" p } EOT
A-6 Samples

Sample Data Matrix Packets
Data Matrix (ECC-200) is a two-dimensional bar code which is
made up of square modules arranged within a perimeter finder
pattern. There are 24 square symbol sizes available ranging from
10 rows by 10 columns to 144 rows by 144 columns. There are
six rectangular symbol sizes available ranging from 8 rows by 8
columns to 16 rows by 48 columns. The symbol size is data
dependent. Data Matrix automatically pads data.
The Data Matrix bar code is only available on the 9825 and 9850
printers.
Make sure you do not overlay other fields when designing your
Data Matrix symbol. Smart imaging is automatically disabled on
formats with a Data Matrix bar code. You should also allow a 3 or
4 dot "quiet zone" (blank space around the bar code’s perimeter)
for scanning. See "Defining a Bar Code Field" for more
information.
Square Data Matrix Packet
{F,36,A,R,E,400,400,"DTMTRX1" p
B,1,50,V,50,100,35,0,100,8,L,0 p }
{B,36,N,1 p
1,"1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST" p }
This example prints a one-inch wide by one-inch tall (100) square
Data Matrix symbol using the default density (0) without any field
rotation (0).
Rectangular Data Matrix Packet
{F,36,A,R,E,400,400,"DTMTRX2" p
B,1,400,V,100,200,35,29,50,8,L,1 p }
{B,36,N,1 p
1,"1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST" p }
Samples A-7

This example prints a one-inch by a half-inch tall (50) rectangular
16 rows by 36 columns (density 29) Data Matrix symbol rotated
90 (1).
Sample Quick Response Packets
Quick Response (QR Code) is a two-dimensional bar code, which
is made up of square modules arranged in an overall square
pattern. A unique finder pattern is located at three corners of the
symbol. Four levels of error correction are available, along with a
wide range of symbol sizes. The 9850 and 9825 printers support
both models of QR Code:
NModel 1 is the original specification.
NModel 2 is an enhanced form that includes additional features.
The maximum number of characters depends on the type of
characters entered for the batch data and differs for the two
models of QR Code.
Data Type Model1 Model2
Numeric data 1167 2710
Alphanumeric data 707 2710
8-Bit data 486 2710
Kanji data 299 1817
QR Code can accommodate Japanese Kana and Kanji characters
and has a variety of applications, including marking spark plugs,
radiators, printed circuit boards, and test tubes. Refer to the AIM
International Symbology Specification for more details about data
requirements.
A-8 Samples

Entering Batch Data for QR Code
QR Code requires certain parameters at the beginning of all batch
data.
Syntax "error_cor mask# data_input, char"
error_cor Level of error correction. Some damaged bar codes may still
be scannable if the error correction is high enough. Options:
HUltra high reliability level
QHigh reliability level
MStandard level
LHigh density level
NOTE: As you increase the error correction level, the
maximum number of characters (in the field)
decreases.
mask# Mask number. Undefined. Leave blank or use 0.
data_input Type of data input. Options:
AAutomatic
MManual
char Type of characters. Options:
AAlphanumeric
BBinary
KKanji
NNumeric
NOTE: In binary mode, the number of characters must be
represented by the 4-digit number in decimal.
Example
1,"HM,N0123456789012345"
p }
Defines the following batch data for the QR Code: The error
correction level is H, which provides very high reliability. Leave
the mask number blank. The data input mode is Manual. The
type of characters are Numeric and the data is
0123456789012345.
Samples A-9

QR Code Packet
{F,1,A,R,E,200,200,"QRCODE" p
B,1,200,V,50,50,36,0,100,2,B,0 p }
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"HM,N0123456789012345" p }
Structured Append Mode
QR Code offers a mode called structured append (or
concatenated) that allows you to collect data from multiple QR
Code symbols and use that data elsewhere. For example, the
components of a sub-assembly can have individual QR Codes
and the QR Code for the entire assembly contains all the data
from the individual codes. This mode also requires certain
parameters at the beginning of all batch data.
Syntax
"mode_id code# #of_div parity, error_cor
mask# data_input char"
mode_id Mode identifier. Use D to indicate the structured append (or
concatenated) mode.
code# Code number of the individual symbol in the concatenated set.
You must use a two-digit number in decimal.
#of_div Total number of symbols in this concatenated set. You must
use a two-digit number in decimal.
parity Parity byte. You must use a two-digit number in hexadecimal.
There is no standard parity byte.
error_cor Level of error correction. Some damaged bar codes may still
be scannable if the error correction is high enough. Options:
HUltra high reliability level
QHigh reliability level
MStandard level
LHigh density level
NOTE: As you increase the error correction level, the
maximum number of characters (in the field)
decreases.
mask# Mask number. Undefined. Leave blank or use 0.
A-10 Samples

data_input Type of data input. Options:
AAutomatic
MManual
char Type of characters. Options:
AAlphanumeric
BBinary
KKanji
NNumeric
NOTE: In binary mode, the number of characters must be
represented by the 4-digit number in decimal.
Example
1,"D0205E9,Q0A,"
p
C,"B006qrcode,"
p }
Defines the structured append mode (D) for QR Code. This is
symbol (02) of a concatenated set containing (05) symbols. The
parity byte is E9. The error correction level is Q, which provides
a high reliability. Use 0 for the mask number. The data input
mode is Automatic. The type of characters are binary (B) and
there will be six (06) data characters (qrcode).
Structured Append QR Code Packet
{F,2,A,R,E,200,200,"QRCODE2" p
B,1,200,V,50,50,36,0,100,2,B,0 p }
{B,2,N,1 p
1,"D0202E9,Q0A" p
C,"0123456789ABCD+__âôû~129~064~159~252~224~064" p }
Samples A-11

Sample Compliance Packet
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"RDCI" p
L,V,500,115,90,85,3 p
L,V,298,245,90,102,3 p
L,V,500,2,0,390,3 p
L,V,400,2,0,390,3 p
L,V,298,2,0,390,3 p
L,V,200,2,0,390,5 p
C,568,8,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"FROM:",0 p
C,568,125,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"CARRIER:",0 p
C,529,124,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"PRO NUMBER:",0 p
C,511,125,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"B/L NUMBER:",0 p
C,472,8,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,"TO:",0 p
C,387,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"(420) SHIP TO POSTAL CODE",0 p
C,391,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"APPOINTMENT NUMBER:",0 p
C,358,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ORDER TYPE:",0 p
C,327,250,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"ITEM:",0 p
C,190,8,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"UPC SHIPPING CONTAINER CODE",0 p
C,557,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MONARCH",0 p
C,547,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"170 MONARCH LANE",0 p
C,537,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"P.O. BOX 608",0 p
C,527,6,0,2,1,1,B,L,0,0,"DAYTON, OHIO 45401",0 p
C,462,313,0,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,"#",0 p
T,1,15,V,529,220,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,2,15,V,511,220,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
B,3,13,V,311,28,8,4,50,8,L,0 p
B,4,14,V,17,60,50,5,130,8,L,0 p
T,5,30,V,161,080,0,3,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,6,15,V,467,40,4,1,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,7,10,V,462,330,6,2,4,3,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,8,20,V,549,124,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,9,30,V,446,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,10,30,V,426,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,11,30,V,406,40,4,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,12,20,V,368,255,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,13,5,V,335,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,14,15,V,304,270,0,2,3,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
T,15,15,V,366,65,0,2,2,2,B,L,0,0,0 p
R,1,"(420) " p
T,16,27,V,270,10,0,3,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
T,17,27,V,240,10,0,3,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
R,1,"WELCOMES GUEST # " p
T,18,27,V,210,10,0,3,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p }
A-12 Samples

Sample Batch Packet
{B,1,N,1 p
1,"1234567890" p
2,"0987654321" p
3,"~20142032678" p
4,"10028028662854" p
5,"1 00 28028 66285 4" p
6,"RODGER DIST CTR" p
7,"8292" p
8,"BROADWAY" p
9,"555 WEST OAK AVE." p
10,"DAYTON, OH 45401-0608" p
11,"" p
12,"08292 123456-123" p
13,"AR" p
14,"999-999999-99" p
15,"32678" p
16,"WYSIWYG" p
17,"99999" p
18,"TO A PRODUCT DEMO" p }
Samples A-13

A-14 Samples

Sample Format Packet
{F,5,A,R,G,576,768,"1HDREC1" p
L,S,19,39,499,39,38,"" p
L,S,19,93,499,93,15,"" p
L,S,19,124,499,124,15,"" p
L,S,19,155,499,155,38,"" p
C,461,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"PO NUMBER ",1 p
C,426,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"STORE " p
C,391,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"CTNS SHOPPED" p
C,357,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"CTNS RECVD " p
C,320,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"CARRIER " p
C,259,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"FRT BILL # " p
C,196,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"FRT TERMS " p
C,159,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"KEYREC# " p
C,125,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"FRT CLAIM # " p
C,090,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"RECVD BY " p
C,056,232,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"DATE RECVD " p
C,461,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,426,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,391,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,357,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,320,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,259,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,196,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,159,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,125,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,090,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
C,056,445,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,":" p
T,01,08,V,461,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
T,02,08,V,426,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
T,03,08,V,391,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
T,04,08,V,357,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
T,05,18,V,290,289,0,1,1,1,B,R,0,0 p
T,06,12,V,230,395,0,1,1,1,B,R,0,0 p
T,07,08,V,196,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
T,08,08,V,159,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
T,09,08,V,125,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
T,10,08,V,090,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
T,11,08,V,056,458,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0 p
T,12,11,V,259,762,0,1,2,2,B,B,0,1 p
R,1,"*_________*" p
B,13,09,V,259,720,4,4,145,8,B,1 p
R,4,12,2,9,1,1 p
R,50,3,8 p }
Samples A-15

Sample Zero Batch Packet
{B,5,N,0 p }
{B,5,U,1 p
1,"6005710" p
2,"106" p
3,"3" p
4,"3" p
5,"ALLIED FREIGHT1234" p
6,"123456789012" p
7,"P" p
8,"10650337" p
9,"0" p
10,"VIC" p
11,"1/6/94" p
12,"106503378" p }
A-16 Samples

Sample Data Entry Format Packet
This packet for the 9403, 9835, or 9840 printers use Options 5
(Data Entry Sources) and 20 (Data Entry Prompts). After the
printer receives the format packet, the operator can go into Batch
Entry Mode at the printer and enter the batch data.
{F,1,A,R,E,300,200,"TEXTILES" p
T,1,10,V,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0,0,0 p
R,20,"PART NUMBER:" p
R,5,K p
B,2,12,V,150,40,1,2,80,7,L,0 p
R,20,"UPC NUMBER:" p
R,5,K p
D,3,20 p
R,20,"FIBER#1:" p
R,5,K p
D,4,3 p
R,20,"PERCENTAGE:" p
R,5,K p
T,5,30,V,80,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p
R,1," % " p
R,4,3,1,20,5,1 p
R,4,4,1,3,1,1 p
R,5,N p
D,6,20 p
R,20,"FIBER #2:" p
R,5,K p
D,7,3 p
R,20,"PERCENTAGE:" p
R,5,K p
T,8,30,V,65,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p
R,1," % " p
R,4,6,1,20,5,1 p
R,4,7,1,3,1,1 p
R,5,N p
C,30,10,0,1,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MADE IN USA",0 p
L,S,110,30,110,150,10," " p
Q,240,30,270,150,3," " p }
Depending on the operator-entered batch data, a label similar to
this one prints.
Samples A-17

A-18 Samples

FONTS B
Monarch® printers support two types of fonts: Bitmapped
(traditional printer fonts such as Standard and Reduced) and
Scalable/TrueType (Font 50). This appendix gives a brief overview
of each type of font and how your printer interprets fonts. It also
shows examples of the fonts loaded in your printer.
Number Font Size and
Appearance Type of Spacing # of Dots Between
Characters
1 Standard Monospaced 3 (203 dpi) 5 (300 dpi)
2 Reduced Monospaced 1 (203 dpi) 2 (300 dpi)
3 Bold Monospaced 3 (203 dpi) 5 (300 dpi)
4 OCRA-like Monospaced 3 (203 dpi) 5 (300 dpi)
5* HR1 Monospaced 2 (203 dpi) 3 (300 dpi)
6 HR2 Monospaced 1 (203 dpi) 2 (300 dpi)
10
CG Triumvirate Bold
(9 pt. at 203 DPI)
(8 pt. at 300 DPI)
Proportional varies w/ each letter
11 CG Triumvirate (6 pt.) Proportional varies w/ each letter
15 7 pt. CG Triumvirate Proportional varies w/ each letter
16 9 pt. CG Triumvirate Proportional varies w/ each letter
17 11 pt. CG Triumvirate Proportional varies w/ each letter
18 15 pt. CG Triumvirate Proportional varies w/ each letter
50 EFF Swiss Bold Scalable varies w/ each letter
70 Paxar (15 pt.) Proportional varies w/ each letter
71 Paxar (18 pt.) Proportional varies w/ each letter
72 NAFTA (15 pt.) Proportional varies w/ each letter
73 NAFTA (18 pt.) Proportional varies w/ each letter
*Fonts
5 and 6 are for numeric data only. The 9403 printer supports only fonts 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 10, and 11. The CG Triumvirate fonts support only ANSI and DOS Code Page 437 and
850 Symbol Sets. The scalable font does not support Code Page 1256 (Arabic).
The Euro-dollar symbol at position ~192 is only available in the Standard, Reduced,
and Bold fonts.
Fonts B-1

These samples were printed using the Internal Symbol set.
Bold Font
Standard Font Reduced Font
OCRA-like Font
B-2 Fonts

These samples were printed using Code Page 437.
CG Triumvirate Bold Font CG Triumvirate Font
CG Triumvirate Font (9pt.)
Fonts B-3

EFF Swiss Bold Font
Paxar Font 70 and Font 71 Characters
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
!#$%&$
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
()*+,-./
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
01234567
5657585960616263
8=>?@;<9
64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
:ABCDEFG
72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
HIJKLMNO
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87
PQRSTUVW
B-4 Fonts

NAFTA Font 72 and Font 73 Characters
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
n
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
5657585960616263
64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87
88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
$
104 105 106 107 108 109
Bitmap Font Information
The Monarch bitmap fonts are either monospaced (fixed width) or
proportional (variable width). Use monospaced fonts for price
fields and data you want to list in a column. With proportionally
spaced fonts, you may be able to place more characters on a line.
However, you may need to experiment with these fonts and adjust
field measurements in your format. The bitmapped fonts (either
monospaced or proportional) appear jagged when magnified.
Fonts B-5

Monospaced Font Magnification
Monospaced characters occupy the same amount of space within
a magnification. Use monospaced fonts for price fields and data
you want to list in a column. Decide how wide and tall you want
the characters to appear on the labels. The following two tables
show the width and height of each of the monospaced fonts after
magnification.
This table includes the default (3 dots for Standard, 1 dot for
Reduced, 3 dots for Bold) spacing.
Using 203 DPI
Width Mag. Standard Reduced Bold
Units Character
Width Sample
Character
Width Sample
Character
Width Sample
1x 1/100 in. 8.37 3.9 13.3
1/10 mm 21.26 9.9 33.78
Dots 17 !8(27 /
7x 1/100 in. 49.75 24.63 84.24
1/10 mm 126.37 62.56 214
Dots 101 '50 .171 5
Using 300 DPI
Width Mag. Standard Reduced Bold
Units Character
Width Sample
Character
Width Sample
Character
Width Sample
1x 1/100 in. 8.7 4 13.7
1/10 mm 22 10.2 34.7
Dots 26 !12 (41 /
7x 1/100 in. 50.7 25 85.7
1/10 mm 128.7 63.5 217.6
Dots 152 '75 .257 5
Only the 1x width can be scanned with the OCRA-like font. Using
a printhead with 203 dpi, the character widths are as follows: 7.9
(English), 20.1 (Metric), and 16 (Dots).
B-6 Fonts

To calculate other font widths, multiply the font dots (14 dots for
Standard, 7 dots for Reduced, 24 dots for Bold) by the
magnification and add the default spacing (3 dots for Standard, 1
dot for Reduced, 3 dots for Bold) between characters.
Example
14 (Standard font dots) x 5 (magnification) = 70 + 3 (default
spacing between characters). There are 73 dots in the Standard
font at 5x.
203 DPI Height Magnification
1x 7x
Standard KQ
1/100 in. 10.8 75.9
1/10 mm 27.4 192.8
dots 22 154
Reduced nt
1/100 in. 6.9 48.28
1/10 mm 17.5 122.6
dots 14 98
Fonts B-7

Bold u{
1/100 in. 16.7 117.24
1/10 mm 42.4 297.8
dots 34 238
OCRA-like (1x only)
1/100 in. 11.8
1/10 mm 30 |
dots 24
300 DPI Height Magnification
1x 7x
Standard KQ
1/100 in. 11 77
1/10 mm 28 195.6
dots 33 231
Reduced nt
1/100 in. 7 49
1/10 mm 17.8 124.5
dots 21 147
B-8 Fonts

300 DPI Height Magnification
Bold u{
1/100 in. 18.7 130.7
1/10 mm 47.4 332
dots 56 392
OCRA-like (1x only)
1/100 in. 12
1/10 mm 30.5 |
dots 36
Fonts B-9

Proportional Font Magnification
Each character in a proportionally spaced font is a different width.
You may be able to place more characters on a line using
proportionally spaced fonts. You may want to experiment with
these fonts and adjust field measurements in your format as
needed. The following tables provide height and width
magnification of sample characters.
CG Triumvirate Bold (9 pt.) 203 DPI
Width Mag. Minimum Average Maximum
1x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
1.48
3.76
36
6.4
16.26
13 =
10.8
27.4
22 D
7x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
203 Dots
10.3
26.2
21 <
44.8
114
91 C
75.9
192.8
154 J
To calculate other font widths, multiply the font dots (3 dots for
Minimum, 13 dots for Average, 22 dots for Maximum) by the
magnification.
Example
13 (Average font dots) x 5 (magnification) = 65 dots in an average
letter of the CG Triumvirate Bold font at 5x.
Height Magnification 203 DPI
1x 7x
CG Triumvirate Bold `f
1/100 in. 8.87 56
1/10 mm 22.5 158
dots 18 126
B-10 Fonts

CG Triumvirate Bold (9 pt.) 300 DPI
Width Mag. Minimum Average Maximum
1x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
1.5
3.8
4.5 6
8
20.3
24 =
11
28
33 D
7x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
203 Dots
10.5
26.7
31.5 <
56
142.2
168 C
77
195.6
231 J
Height Magnification 300 DPI
1x 7x
CG Triumvirate Bold `f
1/100 in. 9 63
1/10 mm 22.9 160.2
dots 27 189
CG Triumvirate (6 pt.) 203 DPI
Width Mag. Minimum Average Maximum
1x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
.99
2.51
26
2.96
7.52
6R
5.9
15
12 Y
7x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
6.9
17.5
14 <
20.7
52.6
42 X
41.4
105.2
84 _
Fonts B-11

Height Maginfication 203 DPI
CG Triumvirate gm
1/100 in. 5.9 41.38
1/10 mm 14.99 105.1
dots 12 84
CG Triumvirate (6 pt.) 300 DPI
Width Mag. Minimum Average Maximum
1x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
1
2.54
36
3
7.62
9R
6
15.2
18 Y
7x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
7
17.8
21 <
21
53.3
63 X
42
106.7
126 _
Height Maginfication 203 DPI
CG Triumvirate gm
1/100 in. 6.7 46.7
1/10 mm 16.9 118.5
dots 20 140
B-12 Fonts

CG Triumvirate (7 pt.) 203 DPI
Width Mag. Minimum Average Maximum
1x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
.99
2.51
2
2.96
7.52
6
5.9
15
12
7x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
6.9
17.5
14
20.7
52.6
42
41.4
105.2
84
Height Magnification 203 DPI
1x 7x
CG Triumvirate
1/100 in. 8.87 56
1/10 mm 22.5 158
dots 18 126
CG Triumvirate (7 pt.) 300 DPI
Width Mag. Minimum Average Maximum
1x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
1
2.54
3
3
7.62
9
7.3
18.6
22
7x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
9
22.9
27
21
53.3
63
51.3
130.4
154
Fonts B-13

Height Magnification 300 DPI
1x 7x
CG Triumvirate
1/100 in. 9 63
1/10 mm 22.9 160.2
dots 27 189
CG Triumvirate (9 pt.) 203 DPI
Width Mag. Minimum Average Maximum
1x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
.99
2.51
2
2.96
7.52
6
5.9
15
12
7x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
6.9
17.5
14
20.7
52.6
42
41.4
105.2
84
Height Magnification 203 DPI
1x 7x
CG Triumvirate
1/100 in. 8.87 68
1/10 mm 22.5 172.7
dots 18 138
B-14 Fonts

CG Triumvirate (9 pt.) 300 DPI
Width Mag. Minimum Average Maximum
1x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
1.3
3.4
4
4.7
11.8
14
9.6
24.5
29
7x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
9.3
23.7
28
32.7
83
98
67.7
171.8
203
Height Magnification 300 DPI
1x 7x
CG Triumvirate
1/100 in. 10.7 74.7
1/10 mm 27.1 189.6
dots 32 224
CG Triumvirate (11 pt.) 203 DPI
Width Mag. Minimum Average Maximum
1x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
.99
2.51
2
2.96
7.52
6
5.9
15
12
7x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
6.9
17.5
14
20.7
52.6
42
41.4
105.2
84
Fonts B-15

Height Magnification 203 DPI
1x 7x
CG Triumvirate
1/100 in. 8.87 68
1/10 mm 22.5 172.7
dots 18 138
CG Triumvirate (11 pt.) 300 DPI
Width Mag. Minimum Average Maximum
1x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
1.7
4.2
5
5.3
13.5
16
10.7
27.1
32
7x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
11.7
29.6
35
37.3
94.8
112
74.7
189.6
224
Height Magnification 300 DPI
1x 7x
CG Triumvirate
1/100 in. 11.7 81.7
1/10 mm 29.6 207.4
dots 35 245
B-16 Fonts

CG Triumvirate (15 pt.) 203 DPI
Width Mag. Minimum Average Maximum
1x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
.99
2.51
2
2.96
7.52
6
5.9
15
12
7x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
6.9
17.5
14
20.7
52.6
42
41.4
105.2
84
Height Magnification 203 DPI
1x 7x
CG Triumvirate
1/100 in. 8.87 68
1/10 mm 22.5 172.7
dots 18 138
Fonts B-17

CG Triumvirate (15 pt.) 300 DPI
Width Mag. Minimum Average Maximum
1x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
2
5.1
6
7.6
19.4
23
15.7
39.8
47
7x 1/100 in.
1/10 mm
Dots
14
35.5
42
53.7
136.3
161
47
119.4
141
Height Magnification 300 DPI
1x 7x
CG Triumvirate
1/100 in. 17.7 8123.7
1/10 mm 44.8 314.1
dots 53 371
B-18 Fonts

Scalable/TrueType® Font Information
The scalable font characters print smoothly, without the jagged
edges you may see when bitmapped fonts are magnified.
Scalable/TrueType fonts are proportionally spaced (field width
varies with each letter).
Format Considerations
When defining formats with scalable/TrueType fonts, keep the
following in mind:
NWhile field rotation can be set to any value (0-3), character
rotation must be set to 0.
NThe slashed zero is not available.
NThe minimum point size for all scalable/TrueType fonts is 4.
NThe maximum point size for Font 50- EFF Swiss Bold and
downloadable TrueType fonts is 255.
NField color (O-transparent overlay) allows closer field
placement (fields can overlap) without the loss of data.
NTo use large point sizes (greater than 60), you must
reconfigure memory and increase the size of the scalable
(vector) fonts buffer.
The height and width magnification are defined in point size. 72
points = one inch. One inch = cell size. The cell size is the
built-in space around the individual characters of the scalable
font. If height and width magnification are not set to the same
point size, the printed characters look tall and thin or short and
thick, which allows for greater flexibility in the appearance of the
font.
The scalable font (font 50) is not available on
the 9403 printer.
Fonts B-19

The 72 point CG Triumvirate Bold sample shows the one inch cell
size.
6pt Sample
10pt Sample
24pt Sample
48pt Sample
72ptSample1"
B-20 Fonts

Downloading TrueType Fonts (9825/9850)
The printers can also accept downloaded TrueType fonts. The
MONARCH® MPCL Toolbox (Font Utility) is available on our
Web site and converts TrueType fonts to Hex or Run-Length
encoding for the printer. Previously, the printers could accept a
TrueType bitmap font that was converted to a bitmapped file using
the Font Utility. However, you were limited to a particular
character set and specific point size.
When downloading a TrueType font, you download the entire font.
You cannot specify a subset (particular characters or point size)
of the font. This allows you to print a variety of Code Pages with
International (Turkish, Latin, Spanish, etc.) characters. TrueType
fonts are designed to be regionally specific; therefore, all code
pages may not be supported in a given font.
These font files are large and may image slower than bitmap
fonts. The size of the font file, in bytes, is the minimum amount
of memory you must have available for fonts in the printer’s
downloadable fonts buffer.
You may need to reconfigure the printer’s memory to use
downloaded TrueType fonts. After reconfiguring memory, resend
the font, format, and batch packets. See "Defining the Memory
Configuration Packet" in Chapter 2 for more information. Also,
Chapter 2 lists some special considerations when defining
memory for downloaded TrueType fonts.
Fonts B-21

Using Asian (Double-Byte) TrueType Fonts
Previously, Monarch printers supported downloadable fonts, but
with limited code pages. Characters are represented by character
code pages. These fonts are designed to be regionally specific;
therefore, all code pages may not be supported in a given font.
For example, using Code Page 1252 (Latin 1), index 192
(represented as ~192 in an MPCL batch packet) prints this
character, À. The 9850 printer previously supported single-byte
character sets, which provided 255 different characters.
However, the 9850 printer now supports printing double-byte
character sets, which provide over 65,000 characters.
Double-byte character sets are typically used in Asian (Far East)
countries. Code pages, such as 932 (Japanese Shift JIS) are
available. Each code page contains several thousand characters.
To access these characters in an MPCL batch packet, you need to
pick a specific code page and a specific type of font encoding.
One standard font encoding is Unicode. Unicode is a double-byte
(16-bit) encoding that includes many characters used throughout
the world. Each Unicode index refers to a particular character,
just like the index in a code page. Other double-byte font
encodings exist for specific characters, such as BIG5 (Traditional
Chinese), GB2312 (Simplified Chinese) and SJIS (Japanese
Shift-JIS).
Double-Byte Bitmap Fonts
Double-byte bitmap fonts, like single-byte bitmap fonts, are
smaller and may image faster than TrueType fonts. When you
create a double-byte bitmap font, you must specify a particular
point size and code page. The batch data character mapping
must match the code page of the font. For example, a BIG5
bitmap font must use BIG5 batch data.
B-22 Fonts

Double-Byte TrueType Fonts
Asian TrueType font files are large and may image slower than
bitmap fonts. The size of the font file, in bytes, is the minimum
amount of memory you must have available for fonts in the
printer’s downloadable fonts buffer. Due to the size of these files,
you must store these fonts in the optional 8-Meg SIMM board.
Character Mapping Overview
The printer can accept TrueType fonts in UNICODE, BIG5,
GB2312, SJIS, or KSC5601 character mapping. Based on your
data and code page selection, the printer determines the type of
encoding (UNICODE, BIG5, GB2312, SJIS, or KSC5601) to use.
Character Mapping Code Page
Batch Data* TrueType Font
Encoding
use in text or constant text fields
UNICODE BIG5 102
UNICODE SJIS 102
UNICODE KSC5601 102
UNICODE GB2312 102
UNICODE UNICODE 102
BIG5 UNICODE 103
GB2312 UNICODE 104
SJIS SJIS 105 Code Page 932 (Japanese Shift-JIS)
GB2312 GB2312 106 Code Page 936 (Simplified Chinese)
BIG5 BIG5 107 - Code Page 950 (Traditional Chinese)
* Characters in batch data must be entered based on their UNICODE, BIG5, etc. ID.
Fonts B-23

Sample Asian (Double-Byte) Font Format and Batch
{F,3,A,R,E,140,400,"EXAMPLE" p
T,1,40,V,50,0,0,1003,48,48,B,L,0,0,103 p }
{B,3,U,1 p
1,"~177~065~177~066~177~067" p }
This example prints these three characters with BIG5 batch data
of ~177~065, ~177~066, and ~177~067. Refer to
www.microsoft.com for a listing of the characters in each code
page. For example, search on a particular code page, such as
"codepage 936" and view the characters for that code page.
Licensing Your Fonts
Monarch provides you with tools to create and download
double-byte/TrueType fonts. However, it is your responsibility to
license the fonts you purchase and download to your Monarch®
printer. Contact your font supplier for licensing information.
Additional fonts that are compatible with the 9850 printer can be
purchased from:
The Electronic Font Foundry
11 Silwood Road
Ascot
SL5 OPY
England
(0)1344 875 201
www.eff.co.uk
B-24 Fonts

Korean, Chinese, and Japanese fonts can be purchased from:
Dynalab Inc.
2055 Gateway Place
Suite 400
San Jose, CA 95110
408-490-4224
www.dynalab.com
Using Font Numbers in Formats
Use the following font numbers in your format when designating
new fonts.
1 - 49 Resident fonts (bitmapped only)
50 - 99 Resident fonts (scalable only)
100 - 499 Customer-generated RAM fonts (bitmapped)
500 - 999 Monarch’s optional ROM fonts (bitmapped
and scalable)
1000 - 8999 Monarch’s optional RAM fonts (bitmapped)
9000 - 9999 Monarch’s optional RAM fonts (scalable only)
If you use a font number that is not a
standard font for your printer, make sure the
font has been installed in the printer.
Fonts B-25

Locating the Font Number in a Font Packet
If you are creating font packets, the font number is the second
parameter in the packet. Software is available to create the font
data and packet. Call Technical Support for more information.
Example {W,200,A,N,68 p
font data p
font data p }
Use this number in T8 or in C5. See "Defining Text Fields" or
"Defining Constant Text Fields" in Chapter 3 for more information.
Example T,1,10,V,30,10,0,200,1,1,B,L,0,0,0 p
C,50,30,0,200,1,1,B,L,0,0,"MONARCH",0 p
Defines a text and constant text field using the downloaded
(#200) font.
Font Number
Font Number
Font Number
B-26 Fonts

SYMBOL SETS/CODE PAGES C
This appendix contains a listing of the symbol sets, code pages,
and extended character sets the printers support.
Use the charts in this appendix to convert dot sequences from the
image dot pattern to codes you can use in the fields. Use the
Binary to Hex Conversion Chart to convert Binary dot sequences
to Hexadecimal numbers for bitmap files. Use the Dot to Run
Length Encoding Chart to convert dot sequences to alphabetic
characters for bitmap files.
Supported Symbol Sets and Code Pages
The printers support these symbol sets and code pages: Internal,
ANSI, Bold, OCRA Character Set, DOS Code Page 437 and 850.
Additional Code Pages are supported with downloaded TrueType
or Double-byte fonts.
The printer defaults to the internal symbol set. See "Defining the
System Setup Packet" in Chapter 2 to change the symbol set.
The CG Triumvirate fonts support only the ANSI and DOS Code
Page 437 and 850 Symbol Sets. These fonts print a slashed zero
when using the ANSI symbol set. However, the scalable font does
not print a slashed zero or support Code Page 1256 (Arabic).
Internal Use this symbol set to print international monetary
symbols, the trademark () symbol, and for
formats that may be used on other MPCLII
printers.
ANSI Use this symbol set with proportionally spaced
fonts.
DOS Code
Pages 437 or 850
Use this symbol set for extended and international
characters with proportionally spaced fonts.
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-1

Using Code 128 Function Codes
This table lists the characters for Bar Code 128 function codes.
These functions are used with scanners.
Code Function Code
~201 F1
~202 F2
~203 F3
~204 F4
Entering Extended Characters
When using extended characters in your batch data file, type a
tilde in front of the three-digit code. For example, if you want to
include the character Ä in a text field using the Internal Symbol
Set, type:
1,"~142" p
Using International Character Sets/Code Pages
Code pages 100, 101, 852-860, and 1250-1258 may only be used
with downloaded TrueType fonts. TrueType fonts are designed to
be regionally specific; therefore, all code pages may not be
supported in a given font. Font 50 does not support Code Pages
101 (Wingdings), 1255 (Hebrew), 1256 (Arabic), or 1258
(Vietnamese). For example, to print Hebrew characters, you need
to find a font (such as Arial) that supports Hebrew characters;
convert, and then download the font to your printer. Make sure
the correct Code Page for Hebrew characters is selected. The
character sets (100 and greater) were printed using Arial or a
similar downloaded TrueType font. To determine the character
code, add the column number and row number for the character.
For example, to produce the ÿ character, you would press Alt 255
(column 15 + row 240).
C-2 Symbol Sets/Code Pages

The Euro-dollar symbol at position ~192 is only available in the
Standard, Reduced, and Bold fonts.
Additional code pages (932, 936, and 950) are available when
using downloaded Asian double-byte TrueType fonts. Each of
these Asian code pages contain thousands of characters, which
are not represented in this manual.
Internal Symbol Set
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-3

ANSI Symbol Set
Bold Character Set
C-4 Symbol Sets/Code Pages

OCRA Character Set
Code Page 100 (Macintosh)
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-5

Code Page 101 (Wingdings)
Code Page 437 (Latin U.S.)
C-6 Symbol Sets/Code Pages

Code Page 850 (Latin 1)
Code Page 852 (Latin 2)
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-7

Code Page 855 (Russian)
Code Page 857 (IBM Turkish)
C-8 Symbol Sets/Code Pages

Code Page 860 (MS-DOS Portuguese)
Code Page 1250 (Latin 2)
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-9

Code Page 1251 (Cyrillic)
Code Page 1252 (Latin 1)
C-10 Symbol Sets/Code Pages

Code Page 1253 (Greek)
Code Page 1254 (Turkish)
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-11

Code Page 1255 (Hebrew)
Code Page 1256 (Arabic)
C-12 Symbol Sets/Code Pages

Code Page 1257 (Baltic)
Code Page 1258 (Vietnamese)
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-13

ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart
Use the chart below to translate the characters printed on your
test label. The chart lists ASCII characters and their hexadecimal
and decimal equivalents.
Char. Hex Decimal Char. Hex Decimal
NUL 00 0 DC2 12 18
SOH 01 1 DC3 13 19
STX 02 2 DC4 14 20
ETX 03 3 NAK 15 21
EOT 04 4 SYN 16 22
ENQ 05 5 ETB 17 23
ACK 06 6 CAN 18 24
BEL 07 7 EM 19 25
Backspace 08 8 SUB 1A 26
Tab 09 9 Escape 1B 27
linefeed 0A 10 cursor right 1C 28
home 0B 11 cursor left 1D 29
form feed 0C 12 cursor up 1E 30
carriage
return 0D 13 cursor down 1F 31
SO 0E 14 space 20 32
SI 0F 15 ! 21 33
DLE 10 16 " 22 34
DC11117 # 2335
C-14 Symbol Sets/Code Pages

ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart (continued)
Char. Hex Decimal Char. Hex Decimal
$2436;3B59
%2537 <3C60
&2638=3D61
’2739>3E62
( 28 40 ? 3F 63
) 29 41 @ 40 64
* 2A 42 A 41 65
+ 2B 43 B 42 66
, 2C 44 C 43 67
- 2D 45 D 44 68
. 2E 46 E 45 69
/ 2F 47 F 46 70
0 30 48 G 47 71
1 31 49 H 48 72
2 32 50 I 49 73
33351J4A74
43452K4B75
53553L4C76
63654M4D77
73755N4E78
8 38 56 O 4F 79
9 39 57 P 50 80
: 3A 58 Q 51 81
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-15

ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart (continued)
Char. Hex Decimal Char. Hex Decimal
R 52 82 i 69 105
S 53 83 j 6A 106
T 54 84 k 6B 107
U 55 85 l 6C 108
V 56 86 m 6D 109
W 57 87 n 6E 110
X5888o6F111
Y5989p70112
Z5A90q71113
[5B91r72114
\5C92s73115
]5D93t74116
^5E94u75117
_5F95v76118
‘6096w77119
a6197x78120
b6298y79121
c 63 99 z 7A 122
d 64 100 { 7B 123
e65101
p 7C124
f 66 102 } 7D 125
g 67 103 ~ 7E 126
h 68 104 delete 7F 127
C-16 Symbol Sets/Code Pages

Binary to Hex Conversion Chart
Binary Hex Binary Hex
00000000 00 00100000 20
00000001 01 00100001 21
00000010 02 00100010 22
00000011 03 00100011 23
00000100 04 00100100 24
00000101 05 00100101 25
00000110 06 00100110 26
00000111 07 00100111 27
00001000 08 00101000 28
00001001 09 00101001 29
00001010 0A 00101010 2A
00001011 0B 00101011 2B
00001100 0C 00101100 2C
00001101 0D 00101101 2D
00001110 0E 00101110 2E
00001111 0F 00101111 2F
00010000 10 00110000 30
00010001 11 00110001 31
00010010 12 00110010 32
00010011 13 00110011 33
00010100 14 00110100 34
00010101 15 00110101 35
00010110 16 00110110 36
00010111 17 00110111 37
00011000 18 00111000 38
00011001 19 00111001 39
00011010 1A 00111010 3A
00011011 1B 00111011 3B
00011100 1C 00111100 3C
00011101 1D 00111101 3D
00011110 1E 00111110 3E
00011111 1F 00111111 3F
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-17

Binary to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart (continued)
Binary Hex Binary Hex
01000000 40 01100000 60
01000001 41 01100001 61
01000010 42 01100010 62
01000011 43 01100011 63
01000100 44 01100100 64
01000101 45 01100101 65
01000110 46 01100110 66
01000111 47 01100111 67
01001000 48 01101000 68
01001001 49 01101001 69
01001010 4A 01101010 6A
01001011 4B 01101011 6B
01001100 4C 01101100 6C
01001101 4D 01101101 6D
01001110 4E 01101110 6E
01001111 4F 01101111 6F
01010000 50 01110000 70
01010001 51 01110001 71
01010010 52 01110010 72
01010011 53 01110011 73
01010100 54 01110100 74
01010101 55 01110101 75
01010110 56 01110110 76
01010111 57 01110111 77
01011000 58 01111000 78
01011001 59 01111001 79
01011010 5A 01111010 7A
01011011 5B 01111011 7B
01011100 5C 01111100 7C
01011101 5D 01111101 7D
01011110 5E 01111110 7E
01011111 5F 01111111 7F
C-18 Symbol Sets/Code Pages

Binary to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart (continued)
Binary Hex Binary Hex
10000000 80 10100000 A0
10000001 81 10100001 A1
10000010 82 10100010 A2
10000011 83 10100011 A3
10000100 84 10100100 A4
10000101 85 10100101 A5
10000110 86 10100110 A6
10000111 87 10100111 A7
10001000 88 10101000 A8
10001001 89 10101001 A9
10001010 8A 10101010 AA
10001011 8B 10101011 AB
10001100 8C 10101100 AC
10001101 8D 10101101 AD
10001110 8E 10101110 AE
10001111 8F 10101111 AF
10010000 90 10110000 B0
10010001 91 10110001 B1
10010010 92 10110010 B2
10010011 93 10110011 B3
10010100 94 10110100 B4
10010101 95 10110101 B5
10010110 96 10110110 B6
10010111 97 10110111 B7
10011000 98 10111000 B8
10011001 99 10111001 B9
10011010 9A 10111010 BA
10011011 9B 10111011 BB
10011100 9C 10111100 BC
10011101 9D 10111101 BD
10011110 9E 10111110 BC
10011111 9F 10111111 BF
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-19

Binary to Hexadecimal Conversion Chart (continued)
Binary Hex Binary Hex
11000000 C0 11100000 E0
11000001 C1 11100001 E1
11000010 C2 11100010 E2
11000011 C3 11100011 E3
11000100 C4 11100100 E4
11000101 C5 11100101 E5
11000110 C6 11100110 E6
11000111 C7 11100111 E7
11001000 C8 11101000 E8
11001001 C9 11101001 E9
11001010 CA 11101010 EA
11001011 CB 11101011 EB
11001100 CC 11101100 EC
11001101 CD 11101101 ED
11001110 CE 11101110 EE
11001111 CF 11101111 EF
11010000 D0 11110000 F0
11010001 D1 11110001 F1
11010010 D2 11110010 F2
11010011 D3 11110011 F3
11010100 D4 11110100 F4
11010101 D5 11110101 F5
11010110 D6 11110110 F6
11010111 D7 11110111 F7
11011000 D8 11111000 F8
11011001 D9 11111001 F9
11011010 DA 11111010 FA
11011011 DB 11111011 FB
11011100 DC 11111100 FC
11011101 DD 11111101 FD
11011110 DE 11111110 FE
11011111 DF 11111111 FF
C-20 Symbol Sets/Code Pages

Dot to Run Length Encoding Chart
ON (Black) Dots
# of Dots Code # of Dots Code
1A14N
2B15O
3C16P
4D17Q
5E18R
6F19S
7G20T
8H21U
9I22V
10 J 23 W
11 K 24 X
12 L 25 Y
13 M 26 Z
OFF (White Dots)
# of Dots Code # of Dots Code
1a14n
2b15o
3c16p
4d17q
5e18r
6f19s
7g20t
8h21u
9i22v
10 j 23 w
11 k 24 x
12 l 25 y
13 m 26 z
Symbol Sets/Code Pages C-21

C-22 Symbol Sets/Code Pages

FORMAT DESIGN TOOLS D
Use copies of these worksheets and grids to create formats, batch
data, and check digit schemes. You may want to keep copies of
the completed forms for your records:
NOnline Configuration Worksheet
NBatch Worksheet
NCheck Digit Worksheet
NSupply Layout Grids (Inches, Metric, Dots)
NFormat Worksheet
NFormat Sample Worksheet
Format Design Tools D-1

Online Configuration Worksheet
The 9403 printer does not support backfeed.
HEADER
BAUD
WORD LENGTH
STOP BITS
PARITY
FLOW CONTROL
F
COMMUNICATION
SETUP
HEADER
I
ONLINE
HEADER
HEADER
POWERUP MODE
LANGUAGE
SEPARATOR
SLASH ZERO
SYMBOL SET
A
SYSTEM
SETUP
HEADER
START OF
HEADER
PARAMETER
SEPARATOR
CHAR. STRING
FIELD
SEPARATOR
END OF
TRANSMISSION
DATA
ESCAPE
IMMED.
COMMAND
E
CONTROL
CHARACTERS
STATUS
REQUEST
JOB
REQUEST
HEADER
SUPPLY TYPE
RIBBON ON
FEED MODE
SUPPLY POSN
B
SUPPLY
SETUP
HEADER
CURRENCY
SYMBOL
SECONDARY
DECIMALS
D
MONETARY
FORMATTING
HEADER
ACTION
DISPENSE
POSITION
BACK FEED
DISTANCE
G
BACK FEED
CONTROL
HEADER
CONTRAST
PRINT ADJUST
MARGIN ADJUST
SPEED ADJUST
PRINTHD WIDTH
C
PRINT
CONTROL
HEADER
BUFFER
DEVICE
BUFFER SIZE
M
BUFFER
ALLOCATION
CUT POSN
0

Batch Worksheet
B1 HEADER
B2 FORMAT #
B3 NEW / UPDATE
B4 QUANTITY
B
BATCH
HEADER
E1 HEADER
E2 FEED-MODE
E3 BATCH-SEP
E4 PRINT-MULT
E5 MULTI-PART
E6 CUT-TYPE
E
BATCH
CONTROL
E7 CUT-MULT
BATCH
DATA
DATA
1
FIELD #
BATCH
CONTINUATION
DATA
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Check Digit Worksheet
A1 HEADER
A2 SELECTOR #
A3 ACTION
A4 DEVICE
A5 MODULUS
A6 LENGTH
A7 ALGORITHM
WEIGHTS
A8
AR
A1 HEADER
A2 SELECTOR #
A3 ACTION
A4 DEVICE
A5 MODULUS
A6 LENGTH
A7 ALGORITHM
WEIGHTS
A8
AR
A1 HEADER
A2 SELECTOR #
A3 ACTION
A4 DEVICE
A5 MODULUS
A6 LENGTH
A7 ALGORITHM
WEIGHTS
A8
AR
A1 HEADER
A2 SELECTOR #
A3 ACTION
A4 DEVICE
A5 MODULUS
A6 LENGTH
A7 ALGORITHM
WEIGHTS
A8
AR

Supply Layout (Inches)
8.0
7.5
7.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0

Supply Layout (Metric)
010 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
200
190
180
170
160
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
203
110 120 130 140 150 160 170 178

Supply Layout
(dpi)
0.0
0.0 96 192 288 384 480 576 672 768 806
480
384
288
192
96
576
672
768
864
960
1056
1152
1536
1440
1344
1248
192 203
0.0
508
406
305
203
102
609
711
812
914
1015
1117
1218
1624
1523
1421
1320
0.0 102 203 305 406 508 609 711 812 853
192
203

Supply Layout (dpi)
0.0
0.0 102 203 305 406 508 609 711 812 853
508
406
305
203
102
609
711
812
914
1015
1117
1218
1624
1523
1421
1320
203 300
0.0
750
600
450
300
150
900
1050
1200
1350
1500
1650
1800
2400
2250
2100
1950
0.0 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200
203
300 1350 1500 1650 1800 1950 2100

D
D
D
D
R
R
R
R
1
1
1
1
R
R
R
R
4
4
4
4
NON -
PRINTABLE
TEXT FIELDS
D1 HEADER
D2 FIELD #
FORMAT
WORKSHEET
TCMPCL2FW Rev. A 9/97
D3 # OF CHAR.
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C1 HEADER
C2 ROW
C3 COLUMN
C4 GAP
C5 FONT
C6 HGT. MAG.
C7 WID. MAG.
C8 COLOR
C9 ALIGNMENT
C10 CHAR. ROT.
C11 FIELD ROT.
C12 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
CONSTANT TEXT
FIELDS
C13 SYM. SET
GRAPHICS
FIELDS
G
G
G
G
G1 HEADER
G2 GRAPH ID
G3 ROW
G4 COLUMN
G5 MODE
G6 ROTATION
F1 HEADER
F2 FORMAT #
F3 ACTION
F4 DEVICE
F5 MEASURE
F6 LENGTH
F7 WIDTH
F
FORMAT
HEADER
R
L
L
L
L
L1 HEADER
L2 TYPE
L3 ROW
L4 COLUMN
L5 ANGLE/
END ROW
L6 LENGTH/
END COL.
L7 THICKNESS
L8 PATTERN
LINES
Format Name
Format #
Date
Supply Size
Supply Type
Customer Name
Software Version
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q1 HEADER
Q2 ROW
Q3 COLUMN
Q4 END ROW
Q5 END
COLUMN
Q6 THICKNESS
Q7 PATTERN
BOXES
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
TEXT
FIELDS
T1 HEADER
T2 FIELD #
T3 # OF CHAR.
T4 FIX/VAR
T5 ROW
T6 COLUMN
T7 GAP
T8 FONT
T9 HGT. MAG.
T10 WID. MAG.
T11 COLOR
T12 ALIGNMENT
T13 CHAR. ROT.
T14 FIELD ROT.
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
OPTION #1
Fixed Characters
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
OPTION #4
Copy Data
from Previous Field
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 SRC FIELD
R4 SRC START
R5 # TO COPY
R6 DEST. START
R7 COPY CODE
T15 SYM. SET
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
OPTION #30 OPTION
#42
R1 HEADER
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R2 CODE #
R3 L / R
R4 CHARACTER
R3 APP CODE
Pad Data Price Field
OPTION
#61
Reimage
Field
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 INPUT ( )
B
B
B
B
BAR CODE
FIELDS
B1 HEADER
B2 FIELD #
B3 # OF CHAR.
B4 FIX/VAR
B5 ROW
B6 COLUMN
B7 FONT
B8 DENSITY
B9 HEIGHT
B10 TEXT
B11 ALIGNMENT
B12 FIELD ROT.
R
R
R
R
1
1
1
1
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
OPTION #1
Fixed Characters
R
R
R
R
4
4
4
4
OPTION #4
Copy Data
from Previous Field
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 SRC FIELD
R4 SRC START
R5 # TO COPY
R6 DEST. START
R7 COPY CODE
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
OPTION #30 OPTION #31
R1 HEADER
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R2 CODE #
R3 L / R
R4 CHARACTER
R3 GEN/VER
Pad Data Define
Check Digit
OPTION #50
Bar Code Densities
R4 CHECK DIGIT #
R1 HEADER
OPTION
#61
Reimage
Field
R
R
R
R
61
61
61
61
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 INPUT ( )
R3 DOT WIDTH
NAR. ELEMENT
R2 CODE #
R4 DOT WIDTH
WIDE ELEMENT
R5 ADDITIONAL
CHAR. GAP
R6 ADDITIONAL
NAR. SPACE
R7 ADDITIONAL
WIDE SPACE
OPTION #51
PDF417 Security /
Truncation
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 SECURITY LEVEL
R4 STANDARD
/DEFAULT
OPTION #52
PDF417
Aspect Ratio
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 ROW /COLUMN
R4 DIMENSION
NUMBER
OPTION #60
Incrementing
Data
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 I /D
R4 AMOUNT
R5 L POS
R6 R POS
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 SRC FIELD
R4 SRC START
R5 # TO COPY
R6 DEST. START
R7 COPY CODE
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
OPTION #1
Fixed Characters
OPTION #4
Copy Data
from Previous Field
R8 NAME.
("IN QUOTES")
R
R
R
R
50
50
50
50
R
R
R
R
51
51
51
51
R
R
R
R
52
52
52
52
R
R
R
R
60
60
60
60
OPTION #2
Data Type
Restrictions
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 CHAR CODE
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
OPTION #3
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 CODE
R4 CHARACTER
Data Entry
Templates
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
OPTION #5
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 CODE
Data Entry
Source
OPTION #20
Data Entry
Prompts
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 PROMPT

D
D
D
R
R
R
R
1
1
1
1
R
R
R
R
4
4
4
4
NON -
PRINTABLE
TEXT FIELDS
D1 HEADER
D2 FIELD #
FORMAT
WORKSHEET
TCMPCL2FW Rev. A 9/97
D3 # OF CHAR.
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C1 HEADER
C2 ROW
C3 COLUMN
C4 GAP
C5 FONT
C6 HGT. MAG.
C7 WID. MAG.
C8 COLOR
C9 ALIGNMENT
C10 CHAR. ROT.
C11 FIELD ROT.
C12 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
CONSTANT TEXT
FIELDS
C13 SYM. SET
GRAPHICS
FIELDS
G
G
G
G
G1 HEADER
G2 GRAPH ID
G3 ROW
G4 COLUMN
G5 MODE
G6 ROTATION
F1 HEADER
F2 FORMAT #
F3 ACTION
F4 DEVICE
F5 MEASURE
F6 LENGTH
F7 WIDTH
F
FORMAT
HEADER
R
L
L
L
L
L1 HEADER
L2 TYPE
L3 ROW
L4 COLUMN
L5 ANGLE/
END ROW
L6 LENGTH/
END COL.
L7 THICKNESS
L8 PATTERN
LINES
Format Name
Format #
Date
Supply Size
Supply Type
Customer Name
Software Version
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q1 HEADER
Q2 ROW
Q3 COLUMN
Q4 END ROW
Q5 END
COLUMN
Q6 THICKNESS
Q7 PATTERN
BOXES
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
TEXT
FIELDS
T1 HEADER
T2 FIELD #
T3 # OF CHAR.
T4 FIX/VAR
T5 ROW
T6 COLUMN
T7 GAP
T8 FONT
T9 HGT. MAG.
T10 WID. MAG.
T11 COLOR
T12 ALIGNMENT
T13 CHAR. ROT.
T14 FIELD ROT.
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
OPTION #1
Fixed Characters
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
OPTION #4
Copy Data
from Previous Field
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 SRC FIELD
R4 SRC START
R5 # TO COPY
R6 DEST. START
R7 COPY CODE
T15 SYM. SET
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
OPTION #30 OPTION
#42
R1 HEADER
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R2 CODE #
R3 L / R
R4 CHARACTER
R3 APP CODE
Pad Data Price Field
OPTION
#61
Reimage
Field
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 INPUT ( )
B
B
B
B
BAR CODE
FIELDS
B1 HEADER
B2 FIELD #
B3 # OF CHAR.
B4 FIX/VAR
B5 ROW
B6 COLUMN
B7 FONT
B8 DENSITY
B9 HEIGHT
B10 TEXT
B11 ALIGNMENT
B12 FIELD ROT.
R
R
R
R
1
1
1
1
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
OPTION #1
Fixed Characters
R
R
R
R
4
4
4
4
OPTION #4
Copy Data
from Previous Field
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 SRC FIELD
R4 SRC START
R5 # TO COPY
R6 DEST. START
R7 COPY CODE
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
OPTION #30 OPTION #31
R1 HEADER
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R2 CODE #
R3 L / R
R4 CHARACTER
R3 GEN/VER
Pad Data Define
Check Digit
OPTION #50
Bar Code Densities
R4 CHECK DIGIT #
R1 HEADER
OPTION
#61
Reimage
Field
R
R
R
R
61
61
61
61
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 INPUT ( )
R3 DOT WIDTH
NAR. ELEMENT
R2 CODE #
R4 DOT WIDTH
WIDE ELEMENT
R5 ADDITIONAL
CHAR. GAP
R6 ADDITIONAL
NAR. SPACE
R7 ADDITIONAL
WIDE SPACE
OPTION #51
PDF417 Security /
Truncation
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 SECURITY LEVEL
R4 STANDARD
/DEFAULT
OPTION #52
PDF417
Aspect Ratio
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 ROW /COLUMN
R4 DIMENSION
NUMBER
OPTION #60
Incrementing
Data
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 I /D
R4 AMOUNT
R5 L POS
R6 R POS
R3 FIXED CHAR.
("IN QUOTES")
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 SRC FIELD
R4 SRC START
R5 # TO COPY
R6 DEST. START
R7 COPY CODE
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
OPTION #1
Fixed Characters
OPTION #4
Copy Data
from Previous Field
R8 NAME.
("IN QUOTES")
R
R
R
R
50
50
50
50
R
R
R
R
51
51
51
51
R
R
R
R
52
52
52
52
R
R
R
R
60
60
60
60
OPTION #2
Data Type
Restrictions
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 CHAR CODE
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
OPTION #3
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 CODE
R4 CHARACTER
Data Entry
Templates
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
OPTION #5
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 CODE
Data Entry
Source
OPTION #20
Data Entry
Prompts
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
R1 HEADER
R2 CODE #
R3 PROMPT
(SAMPLE)

PRINTER DIFFERENCES E
Here are the major features and differences between each printer.
Specific 1464/1465 printer applicator information is listed. Earlier
printer versions may not support all features.
Printer Comparison
Feature 9403 Printer 9825 Printer 9850 Printer
Printhead
Density DPI
(dots per inch)
203 DPI 203 DPI 203 DPI
300 DPI (optional)
Print speed IPS
(inches per
second)
2.0 IPS 2.5, 4.0, or 6.0 IPS 2.5, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0
IPS
12.0 IPS (optional)
Maximum print
area
2.0" x 6.0" 4.0" x 16.0" 4.0" x 16.0"
Non-Print Zone .035" at the
beginning and .10"
from the left edge
Recommended: all
supplies - .05" on
either edge and .02" at
the end
Butt cut supplies - .15"
at the beginning
Recommended: all
supplies - .05" on
either edge and .02" at
the end
Butt cut supplies - .15"
at the beginning
Location of Print
Area
Left Center Center
Supply Width .75" x 2.5" .75" x 4.25" .75" x 4.25"
Supply Length .75" x 9.0" .50" x 17.5" .32" x 17.5"
Power Up Mode Online/
Offline
Online Online/Offline
Feed Mode Continuous On demand/
Continuous/
Peel Mode (optional)
On demand/
Continuous/
Peel Mode (optional)
Supplies Tags or Labels Labels or Perforated
Ta g s
Labels or Tags
Supply Type Black mark
Die cut
Edge Aperture/
Black mark/Die cut/
Continuous
Aperture/
Black mark/Die cut/
Continuous
Printer Differences E-1

Feature 9403 Printer 9825 Printer 9850 Printer
Keypad 21 keys for offline data
entry
Feed/Cut
Enter/Pause
Escape/Clear buttons
Feed/Cut
Enter/Pause
Escape/Clear buttons
Offline data entry with
optional 917 keypad
Display 2-line 16 characters per
line
2-line 16 characters per
line
2-line 16 characters per
line
Serial Port
Speed
1200/2400/4800/9600
/19200 Baud
1200/2400/4800/9600
/19200/38400 Baud
1200/2400/4800/9600/
19200/38400/57600/
115200 Baud
Field Number
Range
0-99 0-999 0-999
Batch
Separator
Ye s Ye s Ye s
High Energy
Ribbon
No No Yes
Standard Fonts Standard/Reduced/Bold
OCRA/CG Triumvirate
Bold 9 pt/CG
Triumvirate 6 pt
Standard/Reduced/Bold
OCRA/CG Triumvirate
Bold 9 pt/CG
Triumvirate 6, 7, 9, 11,
or 15 pt
Standard/Reduced/Bold
OCRA/CG Triumvirate
Bold 9 pt/CG
Triumvirate 6, 7, 9, 11,
or 15 pt
Scalable Font
Standard
No Yes
(EFF Swiss Bold)
Ye s
(EFF Swiss Bold)
Downloadable
Fonts
Ye s Ye s Ye s
Memory
Allocation
Ye s Ye s Ye s
RAM 256K
512K (Flash)
4 Meg
2 Meg (Flash)
16 Meg
4 Meg (Flash)
Storage on
Power-down
512K (Flash) 512K (Flash) 512K (Battery-backed
RAM)
Extended
Memory
No No Yes
2D bar codes MaxiCode/PDF417
POSTNET
MaxiCode/PDF417
POSTNET/Data
Matrix/Quick Response
MaxiCode/PDF417
POSTNET/Data
Matrix/Quick Response
Parallel Port No IEEE-1284 or
Centronics Mode
IEEE-1284 or
Centronics Mode
94x5 Emulation No No Yes
Backfeed No Yes Yes
Offline Batch
Entry
Ye s N o Ye s
with optional keypad
E-2 Printer Differences

Feature 9403 Printer 9825 Printer 9850 Printer
Status Polling Yes Yes Yes
Immediate Commands Yes Yes Yes
Test Label Single label for
printer setup
Two labels for user
and printer
configuration
Two labels for user
and printer
configuration
Ethernet Print Server No Yes- supports IPX
(NetWare), TCP/IP,
LAT, AppleTalk, and
NetBios/NetBEUI.
Yes- supports IPX
(NetWare), TCP/IP,
LAT, AppleTalk, and
NetBios/NetBEUI.
External Knife No No Yes
Stacker No No Yes
Verifier No No Yes
External Rewind No Yes Yes
Tear Bar No Yes (optional) Yes (optional)
12 IPS No No Yes (optional)
300 DPI No No Yes (optional)
1464/1465 Printer/Applicator Information
When designing formats for the Printer Applicators, use the 9850
specifications with these changes:
N1464 Supply Widths: 2.0" to 4.25" (51 mm to 108 mm)
1465 Supply Widths: 1.5" to 4.25" (38 mm to 108 mm)
NSupply Lengths: 0.75" to 8.0" (19 mm to 203 mm)
NSupply Thickness: 2.3 to 7.9 mils (0.058mm to 0.2 mm)
N1464 Maximum Roll Outside Diameter: 10.0" (254 mm)
1465 Maximum Roll Outside Diameter: 16.0" (406 mm)
N1464 Minimum Roll Inside Diameter: 3.0" (76 mm)
1465 Minimum Roll Inside Diameter: 4.0" (102 mm)
Printer Differences E-3

Also, keep in mind the following:
NThe Printer Applicators are released for 110-volt sales only.
NYou can use thermal direct printing (no ribbon) or thermal
transfer printing (with ribbon).
NThe Printer Applicators do not support continuous
(non-indexed) supplies.
Printer Configuration Information
The default configuration packet settings are:
{I,A,0,0,0,0,0 p
B,3,1,1,0,0 p
C,0,0,0,0,0,0 p
D,1,0,2 p
E,{,,,", p ~,--,--,Od/Oa p
F,1,1,0,0,3 p
G,1,95,95 p }
The supply type must be center aperture (3).
Backfeed must be enabled (1). The dispense
position when and backfeed distances must be set to
95 dots using 1/8-inch gap supplies.
Status Polling Information
ENQ Response Meaning
?? Powerup
A@ Online/Ready to receive data after label
has been applied
C@ Label is printing
CH Label is printed
SB Out of supplies
SD Out of ribbon
E-4 Printer Differences

GLOSSARY
Batch Data
2,"Monarch" p
Defines the actual information (as fields within { })
printed on the label.
Batch Control
E,0,1,4,2 p
Defines the print job (as a field).
Batch Header
{B,1,N,1}
First line of a batch, immediately following ({).
Identifies the format and batch quantity.
Batch Packet
{B,1,N,1 p
2,"Monarch" p }
Contains a batch header and the batch data. Enclosed
within { }.
Bitmapped Fonts Reside in the printer’s RAM or in a ROM chip. If you
change the point size, you have changed the font.
Magnifying these fonts causes some jaggedness to
occur.
Buffer Storage area in the printer’s memory that holds specific
data (images, formats, etc).
Field Can be text, bar codes, lines, boxes, constant, or
non-printable text. It is the result of a field definition.
Field Definition Any string of parameters that pertain to one field. A
field definition begins with a field identifier (such as T,
B, D, C, etc.).
T,1,10,V,250,50,0,1,1,1,B,C,0 p
Field Parameters Parameters that apply to a field and are separated by
commas. (In the above example, B is a field element
for Black print on a white background.)
Format Layout or design for your printed label.

Format Header First line of a format, immediately following the start of
packet ({). A format header must begin with F, followed
by various header elements.
{F,1,A,R,E,600,400,"Fmt-1" p
Monospaced Fonts All characters have the same width and are easy to
center justify. (Standard, bold, and reduced are
monospaced.)
Non-volatile RAM
(NVRAM)
Contains information that is SAVED on power-down.
Option
R,4,6,1,3,1 p
Any line within a format that applies special formatting
to a field. This line always begins with R and must
immediately follow the field it applies to.
Packet
{B,1,N,1 p
2,"Monarch" p }
Any string of characters within ({ }).
Pre-image A way to optimize the printer, because it images the
fields while data is collected. After the last field is
imaged, the label prints almost immediately.
Proportionally
Spaced Fonts
All characters have different widths and are difficult to
center justify (CG Triumvirate fonts).
Soft (Downloaded)
Fonts
Reside in the printer’s RAM. They can be erased or
overwritten.
Volatile RAM Contains information that is LOST on power-down.

INDEX
A
adding custom fonts 2-31
adjustments, print 2-9
algorithm,in sum of digits 4-19
algorithm,in sum of products 4-18
alignment,bar code 3-18
allocating
memory 2-21
B
backfeed
packet syntax 2-18
backing up 1-4
bar code
defining aspect ratios 4-14
PDF417 options 4-14
bar code alignment 3-18
bar code density
syntax 4-12
bar codes
character lengths 3-8
customizing density 4-12
defining 3-8
defining densities 4-12
determ ining distance from left/right
3-10, 3-21
determining distance from top/bottom
3-9
generating check digits 4-10
justification 3-18
list of types 3-11
modifying height 3-18
placing human readables 9-6
rotating 3-19
selecting a density 3-11
selecting human readables 3-18
batch
canceling printing 2-28
clearing data from m emory 2-30
downloading sample 6-2
overview of packet 6-3
sam ple A-13
batch control field
defining 6-4
syntax 6-4
sample 6-4
batch data field
defining 6-6
syntax 6-6
containing incrementing fields 6-7
sample 6-6
using entered/copied data 6-7
batch header
syntax 6-3
defining 6-3
sample 6-3
using zero quantities 9-3
batch method of downloading
explained 6-9
batch quantity zero
downloading explained 6-9
syntax A-15
batch quantity, defined 6-3
baud rate selection 2-17
bitmap
defining fields 5-15
defining next fields 5-16
defining the header 5-13
hexadecimal chart C-17
hexadecimal method 5-3, 5-5
overview 5-3
run length chart C-21
run length method 5-3, 5-7
storing the image 5-9
black to white print ratio 5-4
Index 1

boxes
defining 3-27
determ ining distance from left/right 3-28
determining distance from top/bottom
3-28
buffer
scalable font 2-25
buffer selection 2-21
buffer size selection 2-21
C
calling technical support 8-5
changing
backfeed control 2-18
bar code density 4-12
com m unication settings 2-17
memory configuration 2-21
packet control characters 2-14
security level of PDF417 4-13 - 4-14
character rotation
in constant text field 3-23
in text field 3-6
characters
fixed using option 1 4-3
magnifying font size B-6
number of in bar code 3-8
number of in non-printable field 3-20
number of in text 3-3
padding 4-9
placement of human readables 9-6
chart
hexadecimal conversion C-17
run length conversion C -21
check digit option
syntax 4-10
check digit schemes
syntax 4-17 - 4-18
using sum of digits 4-19
using sum of products 4-18
check digit worksheet D-3
check digits
clearing scheme from m emory 2-30
custom izing a scheme 4-16
generating 4-10
checking
ENQ trailer characters 8-2
ENQ/IMD characters 8-2
job status 7-8
packet control characters 8-2
printer status 7-2
RS232 trailer characters 8-2
clearing packets 2-30
code pages C-1
100 table C -5
101 table C -6
1251 table C -10
1252 table C -11
1258 table C -13
437 and 850 C-1
437 table C -6
850 table C -7
entering C-2
International characters 2-10
selecting C-1
color options of text 3-5, 3-22
communication
checklist for trouble 8-4
list of errors 8-14
packet syntax 2-17
resetting printer 8-4
using a mode command 2-2
compatibility
considering unit of measure 1-8
compliance
format sample A-12
compliance label
including in a field 5-22
including in a format 5-4
overlays, defining 5-10
overview 5-2
compliance label overlay
sample 5-18
compliance label overlay sample 5-24
configuration
types of 2-2
uploaded from printer 2-6
2 Index

configuration packets
backfeed control packet G 2-18
communication settings packet F 2-17
guidelines 2-8
header 2-5
memory configuration packet M 2-21
monetary formatting packet D 2-13
overview 2-5
packet control characters packet E 2-14
print control packet C 2-12
sample 2-6
supply setup packet B 2-11
system setup packet A 2-9
constant text fields
character rotation 3-23
color attributes 3-22
defining 3-20
determining distance from top/bottom
3-21
font options 3-21
justification 3-23
modifying character height 3-22
modifying character spacing 3-21
modifying character width 3-22
rotating 3-23
sam ple 3-20, 3-24
control characters
factory defaults 2-3
resetting 2-16
selecting 2-14
syntax 2-14
copy command
sample 6-2
copy data
in partial form 4-8
merging fields 4-7
source field 4-6
syntax 4-6
copying data, using option 4 4-6
creating
DOS batch files 6-10
Cyrillic characters C -10
D
daily checklist 1-4
data
copy option 4 4-6
deciding on a field type 1-9
entry prompts option 20 4-8
entry sources option 5 4-8
entry templates option 3 4-5
fixed option 1 4-3
for batch 6-6
list of errors 8-6
padding option 30 4-9
picking a font 1-9
setting the starting increm ent 6-7
type restrictions option 2 4-4
data entry
sam ple A-17
data entry prompts
defining as option 20 4-8
data entry sources
defining as option 5 4-8
data entry templates
defining as option 3 4-5
data error
label 8-6
data stream
examples A-3
Maxicode A-3
data type restrictions
defining as option 2 4-4
decimal point selection 2-13
decrementing fields
fixing the first number 4-15
syntax 4-15
using option 60 4-15
defining
backfeed control packet G 2-18
bar code type 3-11
bar codes 3-8
batch control field 6-4
Index 3

batch data field 6-6
batch header 6-3
bitmap fields 5-15
boxes 3-27
check digit scheme w/sod 4-19
check digit scheme w/sop 4-18
communication settings packet F 2-17
compliance label overlays 5-10
configuration header 2-5
constant text fields 3-20
duplicate fields 5-17
flash upload packet 2-35
font upload packet 2-31
graphic header 5-13
lines 3-25
memory configuration packet M 2-21
monetary formatting packet D 2-13
next-bitmap fields 5-16
non-printable fields 3-19
packet control characters packet E 2-14
print control packet C 2-12
supply setup packet B 2-11
system setup packet A 2-9
text fields 3-3
density
using option 50 to customize 4-12
design tools
about the grid 1-8
check digit worksheet D-3
format worksheet D-1
online configuration worksheet D-2
worksheet overview 1-10
designing a format 1-5
drawing a sketch 1-7
field type considerations 1-9
filling in worksheets 1-10
font considerations 1-9
print area 1-6
using grids 1-8
worksheet overview 1-10
determining format content 1-6
device selection 2-21
diagnostics
list of communication errors 8-14
list of data errors 8-6
list of data format errors 8-18
list of machine fault errors 8-19
other resources 8-5
printing test label 8-2
resetting printers 8-4
direction of
bar code field 3-19
constant text character 3-23
constant text field 3-23
of lines 3-26
text character 3-6
text field 3-6
disable backfeed 2-18
DOS batch files
creating 6-10
double-byte fonts B-22
downloadable fonts
buffer 2-25
downloading
batch m ethod 6-9
batch quantity zero method 6-9
methods 6-8
modified field parameters 6-10
order packets should be received 6-2
overview 6-1
sample 6-2
sequential method 6-8
to the printer (overview) 6-10
E
enable backfeed 2-18
enabling immediate commands 2-28
ENQ
printing existing config 8-2
reference table for byte 2 7-3
reference table of byte 3 7-6
requesting status 7-2
Response 7-2
entering
partial field parameters 6-10
erasing packets 2-30
error
label 8-6
errors
4 Index

com m unication 8-14
data, description of 8-6
display 8-25
format 8-18
how to reset printers 8-4
machine faults 8-19
F
feed mode selection 6-4
field
bitmap, defining 5-15
duplicate,defining 5-17
graphic, defining 5-22
next-bitmap, defining 5-16
options 4-14
field options
brief list of 4-2
calculating check digits 4-10
copy data 4-6
customized bar code density 4-12
data entry prompts 4-8
data entry sources 4-8
data entry templates 4-5
data type restrictions 4-4
fixed data 4-3
incrementing/decrementing fields 4-15
ordering 4-2
overview 4-2
padding data 4-9
price field 4-10
reimaging 4-15
restrictions 4-2
security/truncation for PDF417 4-13
using multiple 4-2
width/length for PDF417 4-14
fields
bar code rotation 3-19
batch control syntax 6-4
batch data syntax 6-6
constant text rotation 3-23
deciding a type 1-9
finding trailing spaces 9-6
font considerations 1-9
padding 4-9
picking a font 1-9
repeating parameters 9-5
setting the starting increm ent 6-7
text field rotation 3-6
types briefly described 1-9
using a worksheet 1-10
using data entry/copied fields 6-7
fixed data
defining as option 1 4-3
in constant text field 3-23
in text field 3-3
syntax 4-3 - 4-5, 4-8 - 4-9
flash
storing images 5-9
flash memory 2-35
flash upload packet
defining 2-35
flow control selection 2-17
font
legal information B-24
overview 1-9
scalable B-19
TrueType 2-10, 3-4, 3-22, B-1, B-21,
B-24, C-2
font packets
clearing from mem ory 2-30
font upload packet
defining 2-31
fonts
available for constant text fields 3-21
available for text fields 3-4
double-byte B-22
monospaced magnification B-6
optimizing 9-5
proportional magnification B-10
format
buffer 2-25
scalable font B-19
TrueType font B-19
format worksheet D -1
overview 1-10
formats
clearing from mem ory 2-30
decisions to make 1-6
defining bar codes 3-8
Index 5

defining boxes 3-27
defining constant text fields 3-20
defining lines 3-25
defining non-printable fields 3-19
defining text fields 3-3
defining the header 3-2
designing 1-5 - 1-7
determining content 1-6
downloading sample 6-2
field types described briefly 1-9
filling in worksheets 1-10
font considerations 1-9
modifying partial parameters 6-10
referenced in batch packet 6-3
sample 1-2, A-2
sam ple of com pliance A-12
using grids 1-8
formatting errors
list of 8-18
G
generating check digits with option 31
4-10
graphic
defining bitmap fields 5-15
defining duplicate fields 5-17
defining next-bitmap fields 5-16
defining the header 5-13
field, defining 5-22
hexadecimal chart C-17
hexadecimal method 5-3, 5-5
including in a format 5-22
overview of bitmap 5-3
run length chart C-21
run length method 5-3, 5-7
storing the image 5-9
graphic image
including 5-22
graphic packets
clearing from mem ory 2-30
grid
overview 1-8
H
help, getting 8-5
hex graphic packet
sample 5-19
human readable characters
placement considerations 9-6
selecting for a bar code 3-18
I
image buffer 2-24
imaging
repeating parameters 9-5
using zero batch headers 9-3
imaging time
when to use scalable fonts 9-5
IMD
printing existing config 8-2
immediate commands
enabling 2-28
sending 2-28
table 2-28
when to use 2-28
including
compliance label, in a format 5-22
graphic image 5-22
incrementing fields
fixing the first number 4-15
in batch data 6-7
restrictions 4-2
syntax 4-15
using option 60 4-15
inform ation
printing 6-7
inquiry request
explanation of 7-2
inquiry response
explanation of 7-2
International code pages 2-10
6 Index

J
job request
syntax 7-8
job response
explanation of 7-9
syntax for 0-2 7-9
syntax for 3 7-10
syntax for 4 7-12
job status
explanation of response 7-9
requesting 7-8
table 7-13
justification
of bar code 3-18
of constant text fields 3-23
of text field 3-6
L
label
error 8-6
language, printer 2-9
Latin characters C-6 - C-7, C-11
layout
decisions to make 1-6
designing a label 1-5
grid 1-8
print area 1-6
rough sketches 1-7
length
of a bar code field 3-8
of a non-printable field 3-20
of a text field 3-3
lines
defining 3-25
defining as segm ent 3-25
defining as vectors 3-25
determ ining distance from left/right 3-26
determining distance from top/bottom
3-25
thickness 3-27
M
machine errors
list of 8-19
magnification
considerations 9-6
of monospaced fonts B-6
of proportional fonts B-10
mapping
method, hexadecimal 5-3, 5-5
method, run length 5-3, 5-7
margin adjustm ent selection 2-12
Maxicode
data stream A-3
MaxiCode information A-3
measurement
on a grid 1-8
using multiple printer types 1-8
memory
allocating 2-21
clearing packets 2-30
packet syntax 2-21
storing images in flash 5-9
storing images in RAM 5-10
uploading flash 2-35
using flash 2-35
memory buffer
downloadable fonts 2-25
format 2-25
image 2-24
receive 2-24
scalable font 2-25
transmit 2-24
merging
copied data 4-7
fields with option 4 4-6
mode command sample 2-2
modulus
description of check digit calc 4-17
in sum of digits 4-19
in sum of products 4-18
monetary
decimal selection 2-13
formatting syntax 2-13
Index 7

list of options 2-14
sym bol selection 2-13
sym bol setting 2-13
using price formatting 4-10
monospaced fonts, magnification of B-6
N
non-printable fields
defining 3-19
sample 3-20
O
online configuration worksheet D-2
online mode selection 2-9
opaque overlay
explanation 3-5
optimizing
com patibility for m ultiple printers 1-8
print quality 9-1
print speed 9-1
repeating field parameters 9-5
using zero batch quantities 9-3
optional entry
to modify partial field parameters 6-10
options
field 4-14
options,field 4-12
brief list of 4-2
calculating check digits 4-10
copy data 4-6
customized bar code density 4-12
data entry prompts 4-8
data entry sources 4-8
data entry templates 4-5
data type restrictions 4-4
fixed data 4-3
general overview 4-2
incrementing/decrementing fields 4-15
ordering 4-2
padding data 4-9
price form atting 4-10
reimaging 4-15
restrictions 4-2
security/truncation for PDF417 4-13
using multiple 4-2
width/length for PDF417 4-14
overlays
defining compliance label 5-10
P
packet
error 8-6
packet A
syntax 2-9
packet B
syntax 2-11
packet C
syntax 2-12
packet control characters
factory defaults 2-3
printing existing config 8-2
resetting 2-16
selecting new 2-14
syntax 2-14
packet D
syntax 2-13
packet E
syntax 2-14
packet F
syntax 2-17
packet G
syntax 2-18
packet M
syntax 2-21
packets
batch 6-3
check digit scheme 4-16
clearing from mem ory 2-30
configuration 2-5
configuration upload 2-6
guidelines 2-3
padding data 4-9
syntax 4-9
parallel communication 2-2
parameters
for batch control field 6-4
8 Index

for batch data field 6-6
for batch header 6-3
modifying partial 6-10
repeating 9-5
parity selection 2-17
PDF417 bar codes
security/truncation 4-13
width/length 4-14
placing
human readables 9-6
point size B-19
polling for status
overview 7-1
positioning
graphic image in a field 5-12
graphic image in a format 5-13
graphic image in a packet 5-11
price fields
formatting option 4-10
monetary formatting 2-13
restrictions with check digits 4-10
restrictions with increm enting 4-2
syntax 4-11
print adjustments 2-9
print area 1-6
print contrast/vert adjustment selection
2-12
print control
in batch control field 6-4
syntax 2-12
printer configuration
backfeed control packet G 2-18
communication settings packet F 2-17
header 2-5
memory configuration packet M 2-21
monetary formatting packet D 2-13
packet C 2-12
packet control characters packet E 2-14
packet guidelines 2-8
packet overview 2-5
packet sample 2-6
supply setup packet B 2-11
system setup packet A 2-9
upload syntax 2-6
printer differences E-1
printer status
explanation of response 7-2
overview 7-1
requesting 7-2
syntax 7-2
printers
com m unication checklist 8-4
com m unication errors 8-14
data errors 8-6
data form atting errors 8-18
machine fault errors 8-19
resetting 8-4
ways to configure 2-2
printhead
unit of m easure com patibility 1-8
printing
black to white ratio 5-4
canceling 2-28
considerations 6-7
horiz adjustment 2-9
inform ation 6-7
ordering packets to download 6-2
overview 6-1
test label 8-2
vert adjustment 2-9
problem
running out of printer memory 2-30
problems
check digit miscalculated 4-10
com m unication checklist 8-4
dpi varies with printer 1-8
framing error while downloading 6-2
getting technical support 8-5
human readables cut off 9-6
image time and changing data 9-5
image time and unchanging data 9-3
imaging time and repeating field
parameters 9-5
incorrect sym bols print 3-24
invalid packet syntax 2-3
list of communication errors 410-413
8-14
list of data errors 001-499 8-6
list of format errors 571-614 8-18
list of machine fault errors 700-793 8-19
Index 9

missing/overlapping due to magnification
9-6
no check digit generated 4-10
off tag errors 9-6
other resources 8-5
poor print quality 9-1
procedures
backing up 1-4
daily checklist 1-4
print logs 1-4
program ming conventions 2-3
proportional fonts, magnification of B-10
R
RAM
storing images 5-10
receive buffer 2-24
reimaging, using option 61 4-15
requesting job status
explanation of 7-8
requesting printer status
explanation of 7-2
overview 7-1
resetting packet control characters 2-16
resetting printers 8-4
response
to job request 0-2 7-9
to job request 3 7-10
to job request 4 7-12
ribbon selection 2-11
rotating
bar codes 3-19
constant text characters 3-23
constant text fields 3-23
text characters 3-6
text fields 3-6
rough sketches 1-7
RS232 trailer characters
printing existing config 8-2
run length graphic packet
sample 5-20
S
sample
(fixed) data field 4-3
backfeed control packet G 2-18
bar code density option 4-12
batch control field 6-4
batch data field 6-6
batch header 6-3
batch method downloading 6-9
batch packet A-13
calculate check digit option 4-10
check digit scheme packet 4-17 - 4-18
communication settings packet F 2-17
com pliance formats A-12
compliance label 5-24
compliance label overlay 5-18
configuration packet 2-6
copy field 4-7
data entry format A-17
font packet 2-33
font, bold style B-8 - B-9
font, OCRA style B-8 - B-9
font, standard style B-7 - B-8
format A-2
format header 3-2
hex graphic packet 5-19
immediate com m and 2-28
incrementing/decrementing field option
4-15
inquiry response 7-2
job request 7-8
job response 0-2 7-9
job response 3 7-10
job response 4 7-12
memory configuration packet F 2-21
mode command 2-2
monetary formatting packet D 2-13
monospaced font magnification B-6
packet control characters packet E 2-14
padding data 4-10
price field option 4-11
print control packet C 2-12
printer configuration uploaded 2-7
proportional font magnification B-10
run length graphic packet 5-20
sequential method downloading 6-9
10 Index

supply setup packet B 2-11
system setup packet A 2-9
text field 3-3
zero batch packet A-15
scalable font 3-5, 3-22, B-19
buffer 2-25
formats B-19
schemes
custom izing check digits 4-16
security/truncation
using option 51 4-13
segments
defining 3-25
selecting bar code type 3-11
selector, check digit
description of 4-17
sending immediate commands 2-28
sequential downloading
explained 6-8
serial com munication 2-2
setting
backfeed distance 2-18
battery voltage 2-12
baud rate 2-17
dispense position 2-18
feed mode 2-11
flow control 2-17
format number 3-2
language 2-9
margin position 2-12
monetary symbol 2-13
number of decimal places 2-13
online mode 2-9
parallel comm unication 2-2
parity 2-17
print contrast 2-12
print position 2-12
print speed 2-12
printhead width 2-12
ribbon 2-11
serial com munication 2-2
stop bits 2-17
supply size 3-2
supply type/position 2-11
unit of measure 3-2
word length 2-17
size of
monospaced fonts B-6
proportaional fonts B-10
smart imaging 9-1
source field, of copy data 4-6
speed adjustment selection 2-12
standard fonts, list of B-1
status polling
overview 7-1
stop bits selection 2-17
storage device 5-9 - 5-10
storing
images 5-9
images in flash 5-9
images in RAM 5-10
sum of digits calculation 4-19
sum of products calculation 4-18
supply
about the layout grid 1-8
measurement on a grid 1-8
type/position selection 2-11
supply setup
syntax 2-11
supply type/position selection 2-12
sym bol set C-1
ANSI C -1
entering C-2
Internal table C-3
options 3-7
selecting C-1
symbols
monetary 4-10
syntax
backfeed control packet G 2-18
communication settings packet F 2-17
constant text field 3-20, 3-24
flash upload packet 2-35
font upload packet 2-31
format header 3-2
memory configuration packet M 2-21
monetary formatting packet D 2-13
non-printable field 3-20
packet control characters packet E 2-14
print control packet C 2-12
Index 11

printer configuration upload 2-6
supply setup packet B 2-11
system setup packet A 2-9
system setup
syntax 2-9
T
table
bar code lengths 3-8
ENQ reference byte 2 7-3
ENQ reference byte 3 7-6
fixed/variable bar codes 3-8
hexadecimal conversion C-17
immediate commands 2-28
job status 0-2 7-13
run length conversion C -21
technical support 8-5
test label
list of information 8-3
printing 8-2
text fields
character rotation 3-6
color attributes 3-5
defining 3-3
determ ining distance from left/right 3-4
determining distance from top/bottom
3-3
font options 3-4
justification 3-6
modifying character height 3-5
modifying character spacing 3-4
modifying character width 3-5
rotating 3-6
syntax 3-3
thickness
line 3-27
trailing spaces
finding 9-6
transmit buffer 2-24
transparent overlay
explanation 3-5
troubleshooting 8-6
TrueType font 2-10, 3-4, 3-22, B-1,
B-19, B-21, B-24, C-2
format B-19
types of fields
brief description 1-9
U
unit of measure
setting 3-2
unsuccessful communication 8-4
uploading
configuration 2-6
flash packet 2-35
font packet 2-31
V
variable length
padding for 4-10
vector fonts buffer 2-25
vectors
defining 3-25
Vietnamese characters C-13
voltage selection 2-12
W
width/length
using option 52 4-14
word length selection 2-17
worksheet
check digit D-3
filling in 1-10
format D-1
online configuration D-2
overview 1-10
12 Index
